file: 1997 aerostar update:fri jun 7 14:22:51 1996

[PI00400(ALL)08/95]

thirty-six pica chart:

File:01cppia.exUpdate:Fri Jun 7 14:22:51 1996 1997 Aerostar

*[PI00800(ALL)03/96]

thirty-six pica chart:

File:01cppia.exUpdate:Fri Jun 7 14:22:51 1996

*[PI02300(ALL)05/95]

Table of Contents

Introduction .................................................... 1

Instrumentation .............................................. 7

Audio .............................................................. 21

Controls and Features ................................ 59

Seating and Safety Restraints .................. 97

Starting ......................................................... 153

Driving ......................................................... 163

Roadside Emergencies .............................. 199

Maintenance and Care ............................. 229

Capacities and Specifications ................. 293

Reporting Safety Defects(U.S. Only) .................................................. 301

Customer Assistance ................................. 303

Accessories .................................................. 315

Quick Index ................................................ 327

Index ............................................................. 335

Service Station Information .................... 356

File:01cppia.exUpdate:Fri Jun 7 14:22:51 1996

1

Introduction

*[II00300(ALL)01/96] Ford’s Commitment to You

*[II00400(ALL)01/96] At Ford Motor Company, excellence is thecontinuous commitment to achieve the bestresult possible. It is dedication to learning whatyou want, determination to develop the rightconcept, and execution of that concept with care,precision, and attention to detail. In short,excellence means being the standard by whichothers are judged.

*[II00500(ALL)01/96] Our Guiding Principles

*[II00600(ALL)01/96] ❑Quality comes first. For your satisfaction, thequality of our products and services must beour number one priority.

*[II00700(ALL)01/96] ❑You are the focus of everything we do. Ourwork must be done with you in mind,providing better products and services thanour competition.

*[II00750(ALL)01/96] ❑Continuous improvement is essential to oursuccess. We must strive for excellence ineverything we do: in our products — in theirsafety and value — and in our services, ourhuman relations, our competitiveness, andour profitability.

*[II00800(ALL)01/96] ❑Employee involvement is our way of life.We are a team. We must treat one anotherwith trust and respect.

*[II00900(ALL)01/96] ❑Dealers and suppliers are our partners. Wemust maintain mutually beneficialrelationships with dealers, suppliers, and ourother business associates.

File:02cpiia.exUpdate:Fri Jun 7 14:22:57 1996

2

*[II01000(ALL)01/96] ❑ Integrity is never compromised. Our conductworldwide must be pursued in a manner thatis socially responsible and commands respectfor its integrity and for its positivecontributions to society.

*[II01040(ALL)03/96] NOTES and WARNINGS

*[II01042(ALL)02/96] NOTES give you additional information aboutthe subject matter you are referencing.

*[II01044(ALL)01/96] WARNINGS remind you to be especially carefulin those areas where carelessness can causedamage to your vehicle or personal injury toyourself, your passengers or other people. Pleaseread all WARNINGS carefully.

*[II01046(ALL)01/96]RWARNING

*[II01050(ALL)01/96] Finding Information in This Guide

*[II01060(ALL)01/96] After you have read this guide once, you willprobably return to it when you have a specificquestion or need additional information. To helpyou find specific information quickly, you canuse the Quick Index, Table of Contents, or theIndex.

*[II01070(ALL)03/96] The Quick Index at the end of the bookprovides a page number following each itemwhich indicates where detailed information canbe found.

*[II01080(ALL)01/96] To use the Index, turn to the back of the bookand search in the alphabetical listing for theword that best describes the information youneed. If the word you chose is not listed, thinkof other related words and look them up. Wehave designed the Index so that you can findinformation under a technical term.


3

%*[II01090(ALL)01/96] Canadian Owners — French Version

*[II01100(ALL)01/96] French Owner Guides can be obtained from yourdealer or by writing to Ford Motor Company ofCanada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3.

%*[II02400(ALL)01/96] Your Maintenance Schedule andRecord Booklet

*[II02500(ALL)03/96] The Maintenance Schedule booklet lists theservices that are most important for keepingyour vehicle in good condition. A record log isalso provided to help you keep track of allservices performed.

%*[II02600(ALL)01/96] About the Warranties

*[II02700(ALL)01/96] Your vehicle is covered by three types ofwarranties: Basic Vehicle Warranty, ExtendedWarranties on certain parts, and EmissionsWarranties.

%*[II03100(ALL)01/96] Read your Warranty Information Booklet carefullyto find out about your vehicle’s warranties andyour basic rights and responsibilities.

*[II03250(ALL)03/96] If you lose your Warranty Information Booklet, youcan get a new one free of charge. Contact anyFord or Lincoln-Mercury dealer, or refer to theaddresses and phone numbers on the first pageof this Owner’s Guide.

%*[II04000(ALL)05/96] Ford Extended Service Plan

[II04100(ALL)06/96] More Protection for Your Vehicle

*[II04200(ALL)05/96] You can get more protection for your new car orlight truck by purchasing a Ford ExtendedService Plan (Ford ESP). Ford ESP is the onlyextended service program with the Ford nameon it and the only service contract backed byFord Motor Company.


4

*[II04300(ALL)05/96] Ford ESP is an optional service contract, backedand administered by Ford. It provides:

*[II04400(ALL)05/96] ❑protection against repair costs after yourBumper to Bumper Warranty expires;

*[II04500(ALL)05/96] and

*[II04600(ALL)05/96] ❑other benefits during the warranty period(such as: reimbursement for rentals; coveragefor certain maintenance and wear items).

*[II04700(ALL)05/96] You may purchase Ford ESP from anyparticipating Ford Motor Company dealer. Thereare several Ford ESP plans available in varioustime-and-mileage combinations. Each plan can betailored to fit your own driving needs, includingreimbursement benefits for towing and rental.(In Hawaii, rules vary. See your dealer fordetails.)

*[II04800(ALL)05/96] When you purchase Ford ESP, you receivepeace-of-mind protection throughout the UnitedStates and Canada, provided by a network ofmore than 5,100 participating Ford MotorCompany dealers.

*[II04850(ALL)05/96] NOTE: Repairs performed outside the UnitedStates and Canada are not eligible forESP coverage.

*[II04900(ALL)05/96] This information is subject to change. Ask yourdealer for complete details about Ford ESPcoverage.


5

%*[II05200(ALL)03/96] Special Notice[II05250(ALL)03/96] NOTICE TO OWNERS OF

E-4WD VEHICLES[II05300(ALL)03/96] As with other vehicles of this type, failure to

operate this vehicle correctly may result in lossof control or an accident. Be sure to read thespecial driving instructions in the sectionElectronic 4-Wheel Drive (E-4WD) in this book.

%*[II05545(ALL)01/96] Federal Highway AdministrationRegulation

*[II05560(ALL)01/96] Regulations such as those issued by the FederalHighway Administration or issued pursuant tothe Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA),and/or state and local laws and regulations mayrequire additional equipment for the way youintend to use the vehicle. It is the responsibilityof the registered owner to determine theapplicability of such laws and regulations toyour intended use for the vehicle, and toarrange for the installation of requiredequipment. Your Ford dealer has informationabout the availability of many items ofequipment which may be ordered for yourvehicle.

%*[II06000(ALL)01/96] Breaking Your Vehicle In

*[II06100(ALL)01/96] Your new vehicle goes through an adjustment orbreak-in period during the first 1,000 miles(1,600 km) that you drive it. During the break-inperiod, you need to pay careful attention to howyou drive your vehicle.

%*[II06300(ALL)01/96] ❑Avoid sudden stops. Because your vehiclehas new brake linings, you should take thesesteps:

*[II06400(ALL)01/96] — Watch traffic carefully so that you cananticipate when to stop.


6

*[II06500(ALL)01/96] — Begin braking well in advance.

*[II06600(ALL)01/96] — Apply the brakes gradually.

*[II06700(ALL)01/96] The break-in period for new brake liningslasts for 100 miles (160 km) of city driving or1,000 miles (1,600 km) of highway driving.

*[II06750(ALL)05/96] ❑Wheel lug nuts must be retightened to propertorque specifications at 500 miles/800 km ofnew vehicle operation. Proper torquespecifications are provided in the RoadsideEmergencies chapter. Also retighten to propertorque specifications at 500 miles/800 kmafter any wheel change or any other time thewheel lug nuts have been loosened.

%*[II06800(ALL)03/96] ❑Use only the type of engine oil that Fordrecommends. See Engine oil recommendationsin the Index. Do not use special “break-in”oils.

*[II10000(ALL)03/96] Things to Know About UsingThis Guide

*[II10100(ALL)03/96] Congratulations on the purchase of your newvehicle. This guide has information about theequipment and the options for your new vehicle.You may not have bought all of the optionsavailable to you. If you do not know whichinformation applies to your vehicle, talk to yourdealer.

*[II10200(ALL)03/96] This guide describes equipment and givesspecifications for equipment that was in effectwhen this guide was approved for printing. Fordmay discontinue models or change specificationsor design without any notice and withoutincurring obligation.


7

Instrumentation

%*[IS00400(ALL)01/96] The instrument panel (dashboard) on yourvehicle is divided into several different sections.The illustrations on the following pages showthe major parts of the instrument panel that aredescribed in this chapter. Some items shownmay not be on all vehicles.

*[IS00525(ALL)01/96] In your vehicle, the warning lights and gaugesare grouped together on the instrument panel.We call this grouping a cluster. Your vehicle hasa mechanical cluster.

File:03cpisa.exUpdate:Fri Jun 7 14:23:36 1996

8

[IS01800(ALL)01/96]

fullpageart:0095026-B

Aerostar

mech

anical

cluster

File:03cpisa.exU

pdate:Fri Jun 7 14:23:36 1996

9

%*[IS03000(ALL)01/96] The Mechanical Cluster

*[IS03100(ALL)01/96] The following warning lights and gauges are onthe mechanical cluster. All of the warning lightsand gauges alert you to possible problems withyour vehicle. Some of the lights listed areoptional. The following sections detail what eachof these indicators means.

%*[IS03200(ALL)01/96] Brake System Warning Light

*[IS03300(ALL)03/96] The warning light for the brakes can show twothings — that the parking brake is not fullyreleased, or that the brake fluid level is low inthe master cylinder reservoir. If the fluid level islow, the brake system should be checked byyour dealer or a qualified service technician.

*[IS03400(ALL)03/96] This light illuminates when you turn the ignitionkey to START to verify that the indicator bulb isworking. If the light stays on or illuminates afteryou have released the parking brake fully, havethe hydraulic brake system serviced.

*[IS03500(ALL)03/96]RWARNING

The BRAKE light indicates that the brakesmay not be working properly. Have thebrakes checked immediately.

[IS03600(ALL)01/96]

one inch art:0095034-A

Brake warning light symbol


10

[IS03700(ALL)01/96] Rear Anti-Lock (ABS) Brake Warning Light

[IS03900(ALL)03/96] To check the rear ABS brake warning light, turnthe ignition key to the ON position. The rearABS brake warning light should glowmomentarily.

*[IS03950(ALL)03/96] NOTE: If it does not glow momentarily, haveyour vehicle’s electrical system checkedimmediately.

[IS03975(ALL)01/96] NOTE: If the rear ABS brake warning lightbegins to flash in a repeating flashsequence, check the rear anti-lockbrake system continuous power fuseand brake lights for proper operation.

[IS04000(ALL)01/96]


Rear anti-lock warning light symbol

*[IS04100(ALL)03/96]RWARNING

If the anti-lock brake system warninglight remains on or comes on whiledriving, have the braking system checkedby a qualified service technician as soonas possible.

*[IS04110(ALL)03/96] NOTE: If a fault occurs in the anti-locksystem, and the brake warning light isnot lit, the anti-lock system is disabledbut normal brake function remainsoperational.


11

%*[IS04150(ALL)03/96] Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime

[IS04301(ALL)01/96] This warning light and chime remind you tofasten your safety belt. One of the following willtake place:

*[IS04325(ALL)03/96] ❑ If the safety belt is not buckled when the keyis turned to the ON position, the light comeson for 1 to 2 minutes and the chime soundsfor 4 to 8 seconds.

*[IS04351(ALL)03/96] ❑ If the safety belt is buckled while the light ison and the chime is sounding, both the lightand chime turn off.

*[IS04365(ALL)03/96] ❑ If the safety belt is buckled before theignition is turned to the ON position, neitherthe light nor the chime will come on.

*[IS04400(ALL)04/96]

one inch art:0020046-B

Safety belt warning light

% [IS04425(ALL)04/96] Door Ajar Light and Chime

[IS04450(ALL)03/96] This light illuminates along with an audiblechime if one of the doors is not completely shutwhen you turn the ignition to the ON position.

[IS04475(ALL)01/96]


Door ajar light


12

%*[IS04500(ALL)03/96] Check Engine Warning Light

[IS04560(ALL)05/96] This light illuminates when the engine’sEmission Control System requires service. It willalso illuminate when the ignition key is in theON position and the engine is off.

*[IS05300(ALL)04/96]


Check engine warning light

[IS05525(ALL)01/96] Electronic 4-Wheel Drive Warning Light(If equipped)

[IS05550(ALL)03/96] The Electronic 4-Wheel Drive Warning Lightilluminates when the Electronic 4-Wheel Drivesystem is not working properly. This lightilluminates briefly when you turn the ignitionkey to the ON position, but should turn offwhen the engine starts. If the light does notilluminate when you turn the ignition to the ONposition, or if it illuminates and stays on whenyou are driving, have your vehicle serviced assoon as possible.

[IS05560(ALL)03/96] The 4WD light will go off after a few secondsand stay off if all systems are operatingcorrectly. If a problem is detected, the 4WDwarning light will flash a certain number oftimes indicating the location of the problem. Theflashing will continue until the problem iscorrected. Each time the ignition key is turnedon, the controller will detect the problem andflash the signal. The 4WD system remains safe tooperate and the vehicle should be returned forservice.


13

[IS05575(ALL)01/96]


Electronic 4-wheel drive warning light

%*[IS05900(ALL)01/96] Charging System Light

*[IS06000(ALL)05/96] This light indicates that your battery is not beingcharged and that you need to have the electricalsystem checked.

[IS06050(ALL)01/96]


Charging system light

*[IS06100(ALL)03/96] This light illuminates every time you turn theignition to the ON or START position (engineoff). The light should go off when the enginestarts and the alternator begins to charge.

*[IS06300(ALL)03/96] If the light stays on or illuminates when theengine is running, have the electrical systemchecked as soon as possible.

%*[IS06305(ALL)05/96] Supplemental Air Bag Readiness Light andTone Generator

*[IS06310(ALL)05/96] This light illuminates for six seconds when theignition is turned to the ON position. If the lightfails to illuminate, continues to flash, remains on,or if a series of five beeps is heard, have thesystem serviced as soon as possible.


14

[IS06315(ALL)04/96]


Supplemental air bag readiness light

%*[IS06350(ALL)05/96] High Beam Light

*[IS06360(ALL)03/96] This light illuminates when the headlamps areturned to high beam or when you flash thelights.

*[IS06370(ALL)03/96]


High beam indicator light

*[IS06371(ALL)08/95] Chime for Headlamps On

[IS06372(ALL)03/96] This chime sounds if the driver or passengerdoor is open when the parking lamps orheadlamps are on. The chime sounds until youclose the door, turn off the lamps or turn theignition to the ON position.

[IS06373(ALL)03/96] NOTE: The chime will not sound when theautolamp has activated the shutoffdelay.

%*[IS06380(ALL)03/96] Ignition Key Buzzer or Chime

*[IS06390(ALL)05/96] The buzzer or chime will sound if you open thedriver’s door while the key is in the ignition andin the OFF, LOCK, or ACCESSORY position.Never leave your vehicle unattended with thekey in the ignition.


15

%*[IS06400(ALL)05/96] Battery Voltage Gauge (Voltmeter)

*[IS06601(ALL)04/96] This gauge shows you the battery voltage whenthe ignition key is in the ON position.

*[IS06700(ALL)01/96] If you are running electrical accessories (whenthe engine is off, or idling at a low speed), thepointer may move toward the lower end of thenormal band. If it stays outside the normal bandarea, have your vehicle’s electrical systemchecked as soon as it is safely possible.

*[IS06701(ALL)04/96] If the battery is operating under cold weatherconditions, the pointer may indicate in the upperrange of the NORMAL band while the battery ischarging. If you are running electrical accessorieswith the engine off or idling at a low speed, orthe battery is not fully charged, the pointer maymove toward the lower end of the NORMALband.

*[IS06750(ALL)04/96] If it stays outside the NORMAL band, have yourvehicle’s electrical system checked as soon as itis safely possible.

*[IS06900(ALL)03/96]

quarter page art:0020052-D

Battery voltage gauge


16

%*[IS07500(ALL)04/96] Engine Oil Pressure Gauge

*[IS07601(ALL)01/96] This gauge indicates the engine’s oil pressure,not the oil level. However, if your engine’s oillevel is low, it could affect the oil pressure. Withthe engine running, the pointer should moveinto the NORMAL band. If the pointer dropsbelow the NORMAL band while the engine isrunning, you have lost oil pressure andcontinued operation will cause severe enginedamage.

*[IS07701(ALL)05/96] If you lose engine oil pressure:

*[IS07801(ALL)04/96] 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible.

*[IS07901(ALL)04/96] 2. Shut off the engine immediately or severeengine damage could result.

*[IS08001(ALL)01/96] 3. Check the engine’s oil level, following theinstructions on checking and adding engineoil. Refer to Engine oil in the Index. If youdo not follow these instructions, you orothers could be injured. To assure anaccurate reading, your vehicle should be onlevel ground.

*[IS08051(ALL)01/96] 4. If the level is low, add only as much oil asnecessary before you start the engine again.Do not overfill. Do not operate the engine ifthe pointer is below the NORMAL band,regardless of the oil level. Contact yournearest dealer for further service actions.

*[IS08200(ALL)03/96]

quarter page art:0020057-D

Engine oil pressure gauge


17

%*[IS09500(ALL)05/96] Fuel Gauge

*[IS09700(ALL)01/96] The fuel gauge displays approximately howmuch fuel is in the fuel tank only when theignition switch is ON.

*[IS09850(ALL)01/96] For a proper fuel gauge indication after addingfuel, the ignition switch should be in the OFFposition while the vehicle is being refueled.

*[IS09900(ALL)01/96] The fuel gauge indicator may vary slightly whilethe vehicle is in motion. This is the result of fuelmovement within the tank. An accurate readingmay be obtained with the vehicle on smooth,level ground.

[IS10000(ALL)01/96]

one inch art:0020061-C

Fuel gauge

%*[IS11100(ALL)03/96] Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge

*[IS11201(ALL)02/96] This gauge indicates the temperature of theengine coolant, not the coolant level. If thecoolant is not at its proper level or mixture, thegauge indication will not be accurate.

*[IS11301(ALL)05/96] The pointer moves from the C (cold) mark intothe NORMAL band as the engine coolant warmsup. It is acceptable for the pointer to fluctuatewithin the NORMAL band under normal drivingconditions. Under certain driving conditions,such as heavy stop and go traffic or driving uphills in hot weather, the pointer may move tothe top of the NORMAL band.

*[IS11401(ALL)04/96] If, under any circumstances, the pointer movesabove the NORMAL band, the engine isoverheating and continued operation may causeengine damage.


18

*[IS11501(ALL)03/96] If your engine overheats:

*[IS11601(ALL)03/96] 1. Pull off the road as soon as it is safelypossible.

*[IS11701(ALL)01/96] 2. Turn off the engine.

*[IS11801(ALL)03/96] 3. Let the engine cool. DO NOT REMOVECOOLANT SYSTEM FILL CAP UNTILTHE ENGINE IS COOL.

*[IS11901(ALL)01/96] 4. Check the coolant level following theinstructions on checking and adding coolantto your engine. Refer to Engine coolant in theIndex. If you do not follow theseinstructions, you or others could be injured.

[IS12325(ALL)01/96]

quarter page art:0020541-B

Engine coolant temperature gauge

%*[IS12601(ALL)03/96] Speedometer

*[IS12700(ALL)03/96] The speedometer tells you how many miles(kilometers) per hour your vehicle is moving.

*[IS12750(ALL)03/96] Your vehicle contains a speedometer whichreceives its input from the Anti-Lock brakesensor. The speedometer is also used to providea speed signal for correct operation of thevehicle’s Powertrain Control Module (PCM),electronic transmission, and speed control (if soequipped). Because of this, it is veryIMPORTANT to change the speedometer’sinternal conversion constant if the size of thetires on the vehicle is changed. Changing theconversion constant to the proper value when


19

the tires are changed will also ensure that thespeedometer retains the original factory-setaccuracy.

[IS12752(ALL)01/96] NOTE: The conversion constant can only bechanged six times once the vehicleleaves the factory. Your Ford dealershipservice personnel can change theconversion constant.

*[IS12753(ALL)03/96] Some vehicles are equipped with a vehicle speed(mph/km/h) limiting device that is containedwithin the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).The purpose of this device is to maintain peakvehicle speed below a specified limit. (Vehiclespeed limits may vary based on enginedisplacement.)

*[IS12756(ALL)03/96] If you are experiencing an “engine cut-out”condition at high speeds, it may be the result ofthis limiting device. It is a normal condition andcan be avoided by reducing vehicle/enginespeed.

[IS12760(ALL)01/96]

one third page art:0095036-A

Speedometer


20

%*[IS13130(ALL)01/96] Odometer/Trip Odometer

*[IS13160(ALL)05/96] The Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) odometer is acombination trip odometer and total odometer.The total odometer is normally displayed. To seethe trip odometer, press and release the SELECTcontrol on the upper right side of thespeedometer. To zero out the trip odometer,press and release the RESET control on theupper left side of the speedometer while the tripodometer is displayed. If the trip odometer isdisplayed, press and release the SELECT controlto return the display to the total odometer value.


21

Electron

icS

oun

dS

ystems

*[AS00200(ALL)08/95]


Com

pact

Disc

Rad

io

File:04cpasa.exU

pdate:Fri Jun 7 14:24:14 1996

22

%*[AS00250(ALL)10/95] Compact Disc Radio

*[AS00300(ALL)10/95] The Compact Disc Radio combines the ElectronicStereo Radio with the Ford Compact Disc Player.

*[AS00350(ALL)08/95] Using the Controls on Your New Radio/CDPlayer

*[AS00400(ALL)10/95] Most of the features of this unit work for bothradio and CD operation. Also, some of the knobsand buttons control several different functions,so be sure to read all of the operatinginstructions carefully.

*[AS00450(ALL)03/96] How to turn the radio on and off

*[AS00500(ALL)10/95] Press the “POWER” button to turn the radio on.Press it again to turn it off.

*[AS00550(ALL)03/96] How to adjust the volume

[AS00600(ALL)08/95] Press the (R/S) end of the “VOL” button toincrease/decrease the volume. Bars illuminate inthe display to show the relative volume level.

*[AS00650(ALL)02/96] NOTE: If the volume level is set above acertain listening level when theignition switch is turned off, when theignition switch is turned back on, thevolume will come back to a “nominal”listening level. However, if the radiopower is turned off, the volume willremain in the position it was set atwhen radio power was switched off.

*[AS00700(ALL)03/96] Selecting the AM or FM frequency band

*[AS00750(ALL)10/95] Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desiredfrequency band. When in the radio mode,pushing the button more than once will alternatebetween AM, FM1 and FM2. These functions areused with the station memory buttons describedunder How to tune radio stations.

File:04cpasa.exUpdate:Fri Jun 7 14:24:14 1996

23

%*[AS00800(ALL)03/96] How to tune radio stations

*[AS00850(ALL)10/95] There are four ways for you to tune in aparticular station. You can manually locate thestation using the “SCAN/TUNE” button,“SEEK” the station, “SCAN” to the station orselect the station by using the memory buttons,which you can set to any desired frequency.These four methods are described below.

*[AS00900(ALL)10/95] ❑Using the “SCAN/TUNE” button to manuallytune

[AS00950(ALL)09/95] You can change the frequency up or downone increment at a time (FM changes inincrements of 200kHz; AM changes inincrements of 10kHz) by first pressing the“SCAN/TUNE” button twice (display shows“TUNE”), then — within approximately fiveseconds —pressing and releasing either thetop (a) or bottom (b) half of the “SEEK”button. To change frequencies quickly, pressand hold down either the top or bottom halfof the “SEEK” button. While you aremanually tuning, the display will show ablinking “M.”

*[AS01000(ALL)03/96] Manual tuning adjusts your radio to anyallowable broadcast frequency, whether ornot a station is present on that frequency.(See All About Radio Frequencies in thissection.)


24

*[AS01050(ALL)04/96] ❑Using the “SEEK” function

*[AS01075(ALL)04/96] This feature on your radio allows you toautomatically select listenable stations up ordown the frequency band. Press the top (a)half of the “SEEK” button to select the nextlistenable station up the frequency band.Press the bottom (b) half of the button toselect the next listenable station down thefrequency band. By pressing and holding thebutton, listenable stations can be passed overto reach the desired station.

*[AS01100(ALL)02/96] ❑Using the “SCAN/TUNE” button to scanradio stations

*[AS01150(ALL)04/96] Pressing the “SCAN/TUNE” button onceenters the scan mode (display will indicate“SCN”). Pushing the top (a) half of the“SEEK” button will begin the scan mode upthe frequency band, stopping on eachlistenable station for approximately fiveseconds. Pushing the bottom (b) half of the“SEEK” button will begin the scan modedown the frequency band, again stopping oneach listenable station for approximately fiveseconds.

*[AS01200(ALL)03/96] To stop the scan mode on the presentlysampled station, press the “SCAN/TUNE”button again.


25

*[AS01250(ALL)06/96] ❑Setting the Station Memory Preset buttons

%*[AS01300(ALL)06/96] Your radio is equipped with 5 stationmemory buttons. These buttons can be usedto select up to 5 preset AM stations and 10FM stations (5 in FM1 and 5 in FM2). Followthe easy steps below to set these buttons tothe desired frequencies.

*[AS01350(ALL)06/96] 1. Select a band, then select a frequency.

*[AS01400(ALL)06/96] 2. Press one of the memory preset buttons andhold the button until the sound returns. Thatstation is now held in memory on thatbutton.

*[AS01450(ALL)06/96] 3. Follow the two steps above for each stationmemory preset button you want to set.

*[AS01500(ALL)06/96] NOTE: If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected,the clock and station memory presetbuttons (if programmed in auto mode)will need to be reset.

*[AS01550(ALL)10/95] ❑Using the Automatic Memory Load feature

*[AS01600(ALL)08/95] You can activate the Auto Memory Loadfeature by pressing and holding the “AUTOPRESET” button for approximately threeseconds. Auto Memory Load sets all memorybuttons in AM, FM1 and FM2 sequentially byseeking out the first five strong stations forthe respective band and storing them inmemory buttons 1-5. (FM2 will store thesecond set of strong stations from the FMband.)

*[AS01650(ALL)05/96] With Auto Memory Store, you can continuallyset strong stations into your memory buttonswithout losing your existing memory presets,which is especially helpful while traveling. Yourradio will automatically set your memorybuttons to the strong local stations so you don’thave to continually manually tune to existingstations.


26

*[AS01700(ALL)02/96] Activate Auto Memory Store by pushing the“AUTO PRESET” button once. Your radio willset the first five strong stations of the band youare in (AM, FM1 or FM2) into the memorybuttons. The display will show “AUTO,” thenrun through the frequencies, stoppingmomentarily on the stations being set into thememory buttons. The radio is now in the“AUTO” mode and the display will show“AUTO” each time a preset is activated.

*[AS01750(ALL)10/95] NOTE: If there are fewer than five strongstations in the frequency band, theremaining unfilled buttons will storethe last strong station detected on theband.

*[AS01800(ALL)03/96] After all stations have been filled, the radio willbegin playing the station stored on memorybutton 1.

*[AS01850(ALL)02/96] To deactivate the Auto Memory Store mode andreturn to the manually-set memory buttonstations (or those stations set using AutoMemory Load), simply push the “AUTOPRESET” button. Display will show “AUTO”then “OFF.” The next time Auto Memory Storeis activated on that band, the radio will store thenext set of five strong stations.


27

*[AS01900(ALL)08/95] Using the “AUDIO” button to adjust thetone balance and speaker output

*[AS01950(ALL)02/96] ❑ Increasing or decreasing bass response

*[AS02000(ALL)08/95] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly untilthe display reads “BASS.” Push the “+” sideof the “VOL” button to increase bass (more“lows”), and push the “-” side to decreasebass (less “lows”).

*[AS02025(ALL)02/96] ❑ Increasing or decreasing treble response

*[AS02050(ALL)08/95] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly untilthe display reads “TREB.” Push the “+” sideof the “VOL” button to increase treble (more“highs”), and push the “-” side to decreasetreble (less “highs”).

*[AS02100(ALL)02/96] ❑Adjusting speaker balance

*[AS02150(ALL)08/95] Balance control allows you to adjust thesound distribution between the right and leftspeakers. Push the “AUDIO” buttonrepeatedly until the display reads “BAL.”Push the “+” side of the “VOL” button toshift the sound to the right speakers, andpush the “-” side to shift the sound to theleft speakers.

*[AS02200(ALL)04/96] ❑Adjusting speaker fader

*[AS02250(ALL)08/95] Fade control allows you to adjust the sounddistribution between the front and rearspeakers. Push the “AUDIO” buttonrepeatedly until the display reads “FADE.”Push the “+” side of the “VOL” button toshift the sound to the front speakers, andpush the “-” side to shift the sound to therear speakers.


28

*[AS02275(ALL)09/95] NOTE: Illuminated bars in the display showrelative levels of bass and treble andpositions of speaker balance and faderfunctions after adjustments are made,then revert to volume level set.

%*[AS02300(ALL)08/95] Clock operation

[AS02325(ALL)08/95] When in the radio mode, push the “CLOCK”button to switch from radio frequency to clock.Only the clock numerals will be displayed in theclock mode — there is no AM/PM indication.When in the clock mode, the time will bedisplayed until the button is pushed again.However, if you retune the radio while it is inthe clock mode, the new radio frequency will bedisplayed for approximately ten seconds andthen change back to clock display.

*[AS02350(ALL)08/95] When in the CD mode, push the “CLOCK”button to change the display from elapsed timemode to track number mode to clock mode. Ifthe CD track selection is changed when you arein the clock or elapsed time mode, the new tracknumber will be displayed for approximately tenseconds and then revert back to the previousmode.

*[AS02375(ALL)08/95] The clock can also be viewed with the ignitionoff. Push the “CLOCK” button and the time willbe displayed momentarily.

*[AS02400(ALL)08/95] To set the clock, simultaneously press the“CLOCK” button and either the bottom (b) halfof the “SEEK” button to set hours, or the top(a) half of the “SEEK” button to set minutes.


29

%*[AS02425(ALL)10/95] Using the Controls on Your New CompactDisc Player

*[AS02450(ALL)03/96] Your new Ford Compact Disc Player is capableof playing 12 cm or 8 cm discs, without anadapter. The player operates when the power ison and a disc is inserted (label side up). Handlethe disc by its edge only. (Be sure to read andfollow all of the care and cleaning instructionsunder How To Take Care of and Clean Your CDPlayer and Discs.)

*[AS02475(ALL)09/95] NOTE: If after you insert a disc, the disc isejected and “ERROR” begins scrollingin the display, remove the disc andreinsert it right side up (label side up).

*[AS02500(ALL)08/95] The digital display on your CD player willeither show the track (selection) number or theelapsed time. (The display mode can be selectedby pressing the “CLOCK” button.) Indicators forplay (a), stop (X) and compression on (“C”)are also in the display. (These features aredescribed later.)

*[AS02525(ALL)10/95] Once a disc is inserted, operation of the CDplayer will override that of the radio.

[AS02550(ALL)08/95] NOTE: The volume, bass, treble, balance andfader controls on the radio are alsoused with the CD player. Refer toearlier operating instructions aboutthese controls.

*[AS02575(ALL)04/96] How to insert a disc and begin play

*[AS02600(ALL)10/95] Insert one disc, label side up into the discopening. When inserted, the disc automaticallyloads into the unit and play starts at thebeginning of the first track (selection).

*[AS02625(ALL)04/96] When the disc reaches the end, the disc playerautomatically returns to the beginning of thedisc and resumes playing.


30

[AS02650(ALL)04/96] NOTE: Once a disc is inserted, the discopening is secured to prevent theaccidental insertion of a second disc.

*[AS02675(ALL)10/95] NOTE: The CD player has heat protectioncircuitry to protect the laser diode. Ifthe temperature of the player reaches167˚F (75˚C), the heat detection circuitwill shut off the player and “TOOHOT” will scroll in the display forapproximately five seconds (radio willresume playing). When the temperaturereturns to normal operating range, theCD player will again be operational.

*[AS02700(ALL)10/95] How to stop and restart the CD player

*[AS02725(ALL)04/96] When a disc is loaded, the unit automaticallyenters the play mode and the play indicator (a)illuminates. To stop temporarily, press the“PLAY/STOP” button or the “AM/FM” button.The stop indicator (X) in the display illuminatesand operation returns to the radio mode. Toresume CD play, press the “PLAY/STOP”button once again.

*[AS02750(ALL)10/95] NOTE: If the ignition key is turned OFFduring play and then is set to the ONor ACCESSORY position, the CDplayer will resume playing in the modeit was in when ignition was turned off.

*[AS02775(ALL)08/95] Using the “SEEK” feature

*[AS02800(ALL)05/96] The “SEEK” feature allows you to quickly find aparticular selection on the disc.

*[AS02825(ALL)08/95] Press the bottom (b) half of the “SEEK” buttononce to repeat the current playing selection.Press the top (a) half of the “SEEK” button toadvance to the next selection.


31

*[AS02850(ALL)08/95] Pressing and holding the bottom (b) or top (a)half of the “SEEK” button will scroll backwardand forward respectively through the tracks.

*[AS02875(ALL)05/96] How to fast forward or reverse your CDplayer

*[AS02900(ALL)10/95] To quickly search for a particular point in aselection, press the “FF” button (to fast forward)or the “REV” button (to reverse). While eitherbutton is pressed, the disc goes forward orbackward at two different speeds depending onhow long the button is held down. (Pressingeither button for more than three seconds willspeed up the process.) Release the button at thedesired point (found by watching the elapsedplaying time in the display or by listening to thesound during fast forward or reverse). Whenyou have reached the beginning of track 1, theCD player will begin playing.

*[AS02925(ALL)10/95] When you have reached the end of the disc bykeeping the fast forward button pressed, thedisplay will show “END” and the player will gointo pause mode. Push the “PLAY/STOP”button to begin playing the first track of thedisc, press the “REV” button to back up fromthe end of the disc, or use the “SEEK” functionto locate a desired track.

*[AS02950(ALL)10/95] Using the “SCAN” function

*[AS02975(ALL)08/95] Press the “SCAN/TUNE” button to enter thescan mode. Once in the scan mode, press the top(a) or bottom (b) half of the “SEEK” button toscan forward or reverse, respectively. The CDplayer will begin scanning the disc, stopping oneach listenable track for approximately eightseconds. This continues until you press the“SCAN/TUNE” button a second time. While inthe scan mode, the display shows the currentsampled track number.


32

*[AS03000(ALL)10/95] Special features of your CD player

*[AS03025(ALL)10/95] ❑Compression

*[AS03050(ALL)10/95] The compression feature will bring soft andloud passages closer together for a moreconsistent listening level.

*[AS03075(ALL)10/95] To turn the compression on, press the“COMP” button. When on, the compressionindicator (“C”) will appear in the display.Press the button again to turn off.

*[AS03100(ALL)10/95] ❑Automatic Disc Storage

*[AS03125(ALL)10/95] If the disc is ejected from the CD player butis not removed from the disc opening withinapproximately 10 seconds, the player willautomatically reload the disc for storage,unless the disc is automatically ejected due toa “focus error” (disc inserted upside down).In this case, the disc will not be automaticallyreloaded.

*[AS03150(ALL)04/96] How to eject the disc

*[AS03175(ALL)10/95] Push the “EJECT” button to stop play, eject thedisc and resume radio operation of your audiosystem.

*[AS03200(ALL)10/95] NOTE: You can eject the disc while the radiopower and/or ignition is on or off.

%*[AS03225(ALL)08/95] How To Take Care of and Clean Your CDPlayer and Discs

*[AS03250(ALL)08/95] To ensure the continued performance of yourFord Compact Disc Player, carefully read thefollowing precautions:

*[AS03275(ALL)04/96] ❑Always handle the disc by its edge. Nevertouch the playing surface.


33

*[AS03281(ALL)08/95] ❑Before playing, inspect the disc for anycontamination. If needed, clean the disc withan approved disc cleaner, such as theDiscwasherH Compact Disc Cleaner or theAllsop 3H Compact Disc Cleaner, by wipingfrom the center out to the edges. Do not usea circular motion to clean.

*[AS03286(ALL)04/96] ❑Do not clean discs with solvents such asbenzine, thinner, commercially availablecleaners or antistatic spray intended foranalog records.

*[AS03291(ALL)04/96] ❑Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight orheat sources such as defroster and floorheating ducts. Do not leave any discs in aparked car in direct sunlight where there maybe a considerable rise in temperature ordamage may result.

*[AS03296(ALL)04/96] ❑After playing, store the disc in its case.

*[AS03300(ALL)04/96] ❑ If a disc has already been inserted, do not tryto insert another disc. Doing so may damagethe disc player.

*[AS03325(ALL)04/96] ❑Do not insert anything other than a disc intothe disc player.

*[AS03350(ALL)04/96] NOTE: The use of optical instruments withthis product will increase eye hazard asthe laser beam used in this compactdisc player is harmful to the eyes. Donot attempt to disassemble the case.Refer servicing to qualified personnelonly.


34

*[AS03375(ALL)08/95] Common Operating Conditions of YourCD Player

*[AS03400(ALL)04/96] The following information is designed to helpyou recognize typical situations that could bemistakenly interpreted as mechanicalmalfunctions of the disc player.

*[AS03425(ALL)04/96] ❑A disc is already loaded.

*[AS03450(ALL)04/96] ❑The disc is inserted with the label surfacedownward.

*[AS03475(ALL)04/96] ❑The disc is dusty or defective.

*[AS03500(ALL)08/95] ❑The player’s internal temperature is above140˚F (60˚C). Allow the player to cool offbefore operating.

*[AS03525(ALL)08/95] ❑Different manufacturers of compact discs mayproduce discs with different dimensions ortolerances, some of which may not be withinindustry standards or in accordance with theCD format. Because of this, a new disc that isfree of dust and scratches could be defectiveand may not play on your Ford CompactDisc Player.

[AS03550(ALL)09/95] If play does not begin once the disc has beeninserted:

*[AS03575(ALL)04/96] ❑The radio is not on.

*[AS03600(ALL)04/96] ❑The unit is in the stop mode.

*[AS03625(ALL)04/96] ❑Moisture may have condensed on the lenseswithin the unit. If this occurs, remove thedisc and wait approximately an hour until themoisture evaporates.

*[AS03650(ALL)04/96] If the sound skips:

*[AS03675(ALL)04/96] ❑Badly scratched discs or extremely roughroads will cause the sound to skip. Skippingwill not damage the disc player or scratch thediscs.


35

%*[AS03700(ALL)08/95]

High

-Level

Au

dio

System

[AS03725(ALL)04/96]


High

-Level

Au

dio

System

File:04cpasa.exU

pdate:Fri Jun 7 14:24:14 1996

36

*[AS03750(ALL)03/96] Using the Controls on Your New Radio

*[AS03775(ALL)03/96] How to turn the radio on and off

*[AS03800(ALL)10/95] Press the “POWER” button to turn the radio on.Press it again to turn it off.


*[AS03850(ALL)03/96] Press the (R/S) side of the “VOL” button toincrease/decrease the volume. Bars illuminate inthe display to show the relative volume level.

*[AS03875(ALL)02/96] NOTE: If the volume level is set above acertain listening level when theignition switch is turned off, when theignition switch is turned back on, thevolume will come back to a “nominal”listening level. However, if the radiopower is turned off, the volume willremain in the position it was set atwhen radio power was switched off.

*[AS03900(ALL)03/96] Selecting the AM or FM frequency band

*[AS03925(ALL)08/95] Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desiredfrequency band. When in the radio mode,pushing the button more than once will alternatebetween AM, FM1 and FM2. These functions areused with the station memory buttons describedunder How to Tune Radio Stations.


37

%*[AS03950(ALL)03/96] How to tune radio stations

*[AS03975(ALL)10/95] There are four ways for you to tune in aparticular station. You can manually locate thestation using the “SCAN/TUNE” button,“SEEK” the station, “SCAN” to the station orselect the station by using the memory buttons,which you can set to any desired frequency.These four methods are described below.

*[AS04000(ALL)09/95] ❑Using the “TUNE” function (Stereo Radio)

*[AS04025(ALL)03/96] You can change the frequency up or downone increment at a time (FM changes inincrements of 200 kHz; AM changes inincrements of 10 kHz) by first pressing the“SCAN/TUNE” button twice (display shows“TUNE”), then — within approximately fiveseconds —pressing and releasing either theright a or left b side of the “SEEK” button.To change frequencies quickly, press andhold down either the right or left side of the“SEEK” button.



[AS04100(ALL)05/96] This feature on your radio allows you toautomatically select listenable stations up ordown the frequency band. Press the right(a) side of the “SEEK” button to select thenext listenable station up the frequency band.Press the left (b) side of the button to selectthe next listenable station down thefrequency band. By holding the button down,listenable stations can be passed over to reachthe desired station.


38

*[AS04125(ALL)04/96] ❑Using the “SCAN” function

[AS04150(ALL)08/95] Pressing the “SCAN/TUNE” button onceenters the scan mode (display will indicate“SCN”). Pushing the right (a) side of the“SEEK” button will begin the scan mode upthe frequency band, stopping on eachlistenable station for approximately afive-second sampling. Pushing the left (b)side of the “SEEK” button will begin the scanmode down the frequency band, againstopping on each listenable station forapproximately a five-second sampling.

*[AS04175(ALL)03/96] To stop the scan mode on the presentlysampled station, press the “SCAN/TUNE”button again.


[AS04225(ALL)08/95] Your radio is equipped with 5 stationmemory buttons. These buttons can be usedto select up to 5 preset AM stations and 10FM stations (5 in FM1 and 5 in FM2).

*[AS04250(ALL)08/95] Follow the easy steps below to set these buttonsto the desired frequencies:


[AS04300(ALL)08/95] 2. Press one of the memory buttons and holdthe button until the sound returns. Thatstation is now held in memory on thatbutton.


[AS04350(ALL)08/95] NOTE: If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected,the station memory preset buttons (ifprogrammed in auto mode) will needto be reset.


39

*[AS04375(ALL)10/95] ❑Using the Automatic Memory Load feature

*[AS04400(ALL)08/95] You can activate the Auto Memory Loadfeature by pressing and holding the “AUTOPRESET” button for approximately threeseconds. Auto Memory Load sets all memorybuttons in AM, FM1 and FM2 sequentially byseeking out the first five strong stations forthe respective band and storing them inmemory buttons 1-5. (FM2 will store thesecond set of strong stations from the FMband.)

*[AS04425(ALL)05/96] With Auto Memory Store, you can continuallyset strong stations into your memory buttonswithout losing your existing memory presets,which is especially helpful while traveling. Yourradio will automatically set your memorybuttons to the strong local stations so you don’thave to continually manually tune to existingstations.

*[AS04450(ALL)02/96] Activate Auto Memory Store by pushing the“AUTO PRESET” button once. Your radio willset the first five strong stations of the band youare in (AM, FM1 or FM2) into the memorybuttons. The display will show “AUTO,” thenrun through the frequencies, stoppingmomentarily on the stations being set into thememory buttons. The radio is now in the“AUTO” mode and the display will show“AUTO” each time a preset is activated.

*[AS04475(ALL)10/95] NOTE: If there are fewer than five strongstations in the frequency band, theremaining unfilled buttons will storethe last strong station detected on theband.

*[AS04500(ALL)03/96] After all stations have been filled, the radio willbegin playing the station stored on memorybutton 1.


40

*[AS04525(ALL)02/96] To deactivate the Auto Memory Store mode andreturn to the manually-set memory buttonstations (or those stations set using AutoMemory Load), simply push the “AUTOPRESET” button. Display will show “AUTO”then “OFF.” The next time Auto Memory Storeis activated on that band, the radio will store thenext set of five strong stations.

*[AS04550(ALL)10/95] Adjusting the tone balance and speakeroutput of your radio

*[AS04575(ALL)02/96] ❑ Increasing or decreasing bass response

*[AS04600(ALL)08/95] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly untilthe display reads “BASS.” Push the “+” sideof the “VOL” button to increase bass (more“lows”), and push the “-” side to decreasebass (less “lows”).

*[AS04625(ALL)02/96] ❑ Increasing or decreasing treble response

*[AS04650(ALL)08/95] Push the “AUDIO” button repeatedly untilthe display reads “TREB.” Push the “+” sideof the “VOL” button to increase treble (more“highs”), and push the “-” side to decreasetreble (less “highs”).

*[AS04675(ALL)02/96] ❑Adjusting speaker balance

*[AS04700(ALL)08/95] Balance control allows you to adjust thesound distribution between the right and leftspeakers. Push the “AUDIO” buttonrepeatedly until the display reads “BAL.”Push the “+” side of the “VOL” button toshift the sound to the right speakers, andpush the “-” side to shift the sound to theleft speakers.


41

*[AS04725(ALL)04/96] ❑Adjusting speaker fader

*[AS04750(ALL)08/95] Fade control allows you to adjust the sounddistribution between the front and rearspeakers. Push the “AUDIO” buttonrepeatedly until the display reads “FADE.”Push the “+” side of the “VOL” button toshift the sound to the front speakers, andpush the “-” side to shift the sound to therear speakers.

*[AS04775(ALL)09/95] NOTE: Illuminated bars in the display showrelative levels of bass and treble andpositions of speaker balance and faderfunctions after adjustments are made,then revert to volume level set.

[AS04800(ALL)05/96] Using the Controls of Your Cassette TapePlayer (If equipped)

*[AS04825(ALL)08/95] How to insert a tape

*[AS04850(ALL)08/95] Your cassette tape player is equipped withpower loading. Once you insert a tape and pushslightly (with the open edge to the right), theloading mechanism draws the tape the rest ofthe way in and play will begin after amomentary tape tightening process. Displayindicates “M” (for metal/CrO

2) while tape is

playing.

*[AS04875(ALL)08/95] NOTE: A cassette tape can be loaded with theignition on whether or not the radiopower is on.


42

*[AS04900(ALL)12/95] How to locate a desired track on the tape

*[AS04925(ALL)08/95] There are four ways to quickly locate a desiredselection on the tape. You can use the fastforward, rewind, “SEEK” or “SCAN” function.Following are brief descriptions of each.

*[AS04950(ALL)09/95] ❑Fast forwarding the tape

*[AS04975(ALL)03/96] To fast forward the tape, press the “FF”button. The radio will automatically beginplaying until fast forward is manuallystopped. At the end of the tape, the directionautomatically reverses and plays the otherside of the tape.

*[AS05000(ALL)08/95] ❑Rewinding the tape

*[AS05025(ALL)08/95] To rewind the tape, press the “REW” button.

[AS05050(ALL)04/96] The radio will automatically begin playinguntil rewind is manually stopped or thebeginning of the tape is reached.

*[AS05075(ALL)08/95] ❑Using the “SEEK” function with your cassettetape player

*[AS05100(ALL)03/96] While in the tape mode, push the right aside of the “SEEK” button to seek forward tothe next selection on the tape. Push the leftb side to seek the previous tape selection.

*[AS05125(ALL)03/96] NOTE: If you want to restart a currentlyplaying tape selection, press the left bside of the “SEEK” button afterapproximately three seconds into thecurrent selection.


43

*[AS05150(ALL)03/96] Whirling sprockets in the display l indicatethe direction of tape travel.

*[AS05175(ALL)08/95] ❑Using the “SCAN” function with yourcassette tape player

*[AS05200(ALL)03/96] Press the “SCAN/TUNE” button to enter thescan mode (display indicates “SCN”).Pushing the right a side of the “SEEK”button will begin the forward scan mode onthe tape currently playing, stopping on eachtape selection for approximately aneight-second sampling.

*[AS05225(ALL)03/96] Pushing the left b side of the “SEEK”button will begin the reverse scan mode,stopping on each previous tape selection forapproximately an eight-second sampling.While scanning, the display indicates whirlingsprockets plus an “S” m.

*[AS05250(ALL)03/96] To stop the scan mode on the presentlysampled tape selection, press the“SCAN/TUNE” button again.

*[AS05275(ALL)08/95] ❑How to change the side of the tape beingplayed

*[AS05300(ALL)08/95] The alternate track of the tape can be selectedanytime by pressing the “PLAY/PROG”button.

*[AS05325(ALL)08/95] How to eject the tape

*[AS05350(ALL)08/95] To stop the tape and eject the cassette, press the“EJCT” button. The radio will resume playing ifthe radio power is on. The tape cartridge can beejected with radio power (and/or ignition) on oroff.


44

*[AS05375(ALL)08/95] How to store the tape

*[AS05400(ALL)08/95] Press the “AM/FM” button to stop the tapeplayer and resume radio play. The cassette willbe stored in the tape player and the X symbolin the display will be lit until you push the“PLAY PROG” button to resume tape play. Fastforward and fast rewind can be used while thetape is in storage mode without interruptingradio play.

*[AS05425(ALL)02/96] Using the DolbyH B noise reduction feature

*[AS05450(ALL)09/95] NOTE: Noise reduction system manufacturedunder license from Dolby LabsLicensing Corporation. “Dolby” anddouble-D symbol are trademarks ofDolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation.

*[AS05475(ALL)08/95] Push the k button to activate. When on, thek symbol above the button will be lit.

%*[AS05500(ALL)05/96] Clock Operation

*[AS05525(ALL)05/96] How to view the clock mode

*[AS05550(ALL)08/95] Press the “CLOCK” button to alternate thefrequency and time in the display. In the clockmode, pressing any radio function willautomatically display the radio frequency forapproximately ten seconds before changing backto the clock mode.

*[AS05575(ALL)05/96] How to set the clock

*[AS05600(ALL)05/96] 1. Turn the radio on.

*[AS05625(ALL)04/96] 2. Press and hold in the “CLOCK” button.Press the “SEEK” button left (b) to advancethe hours and right (a) to advance theminutes.

*[AS05650(ALL)05/96] NOTE: The clock displays 12-hour time withno AM/PM indications.


45

*[AS05675(ALL)09/95] NOTE: On the High-Level Audio System, theclock can be set with the radio poweron or off.

*[AS05700(ALL)08/95] Tape error messages

*[AS05725(ALL)08/95] Your cassette tape player is equipped todiagnose certain problems you may experience.Error codes are as follows:

*[AS05750(ALL)08/95] Error 0 — Communication error between theradio controller and the tape controller. Thecassette player will eject the tape. Insert the tapeagain. If the same error code appears, turn theignition off, then back on again and insert thetape.

*[AS05775(ALL)08/95] Error 1 — Possible problem cartridge. Thecassette tape player will eject the tape. Insert thetape again. If the same error code appears in thedisplay, try a different cartridge.

*[AS05800(ALL)08/95] Error 2 — Tape eject or load failure. Yourcassette tape player will go into the pause mode.Push “EJCT” to eject the tape. If the tape doesn’teject, refer the problem to qualified personnel forservice.

*[AS05825(ALL)05/96] Tips on Caring for the Cassette Player andTapes

*[AS05850(ALL)08/95] In order to keep your cassette tape playerperforming the way it was meant to, read andfollow these simple precautions:

*[AS05875(ALL)05/96] ❑Using a Ford or equivalent cassette cleaningcartridge to clean the tape player head after10-12 hours of play will help maintain thebest playback sound and proper tapeoperation.

*[AS05900(ALL)08/95] ❑Only cassettes that are 90 minutes long orless should be used. Tapes longer than 90minutes are thinner and subject to breakageor may jam the tape player mechanism.


46

*[AS05925(ALL)08/95] ❑Protect cassettes from exposure to directsunlight, high humidity and extreme heat orcold. If they are exposed to extremeconditions, allow them to reach a moderatetemperature before playing.

*[AS05950(ALL)08/95] ❑ If a tape is loose inside the cassette, tighten itbefore playing by putting your finger or apencil into one of the holes and turning thehub until the tape is tight.

*[AS05975(ALL)08/95] ❑Loose labels on cassette tapes can becomelodged in the mechanism. Remove any looselabel material before inserting cassette.

*[AS06000(ALL)08/95] ❑Do not leave a tape in the cassette tapeplayer. High heat in the vehicle can cause thecassette to warp.


47

*[AS06550(ALL)02/96]

fullpageart:0060586-C

Electron

icS

tereoR

adio

File:04cpasa.exU

pdate:Fri Jun 7 14:24:14 1996

48

[AS06575(ALL)05/96]

fullpageart:0095103-A

Electron

icS

tereoR

adio

with

Cassette

File:04cpasa.exU

pdate:Fri Jun 7 14:24:14 1996

49

%*[AS06600(ALL)09/95] Electronic Stereo and StereoCassette Radios

*[AS06625(ALL)03/96] Using the Controls on Your New Radio

*[AS06650(ALL)02/96] How to tune radio stations (Stereo Radio)

*[AS06675(ALL)02/96] There are three ways for you to tune in to aparticular station. You can manually locate thestation by using the “TUNE” button, “SEEK” thestation or select the station by using the memorypreset buttons, which you can set to any desiredfrequency.

%*[AS06700(ALL)02/96] How to tune radio stations (Stereo CassetteRadio)

[AS06725(ALL)06/96] There are five ways for you to tune in to aparticular station. You can manually locate thestation by using the “Tune” button, AutomaticMusic Search (“AMS”), “SEEK” the station,“SCAN” to the station or select the station byusing the memory preset buttons, which you canset to any desired frequency.

*[AS06750(ALL)09/95] ❑Using the “TUNE” function (Stereo Radio)

*[AS06775(ALL)08/95] You can change the frequency up or downone increment at a time by pressing andreleasing either the right (+) or left (S) sideof the “TUNE” button. To change frequenciesquickly, press and hold down either the rightor left side of the “TUNE” button.



50

*[AS06825(ALL)02/96] ❑Using the “AMS” function to manually tuneyour radio (Stereo Cassette Radio)

[AS06850(ALL)09/95] You can change the frequency up or downone increment at a time by first pressing the“AMS” button (display shows “TUNE”) thenwithin approximately five seconds pressingand releasing either the right (a) or left (b)side of the “SEEK” button. To changefrequencies quickly, press and hold downeither the right or left side of the “SEEK”button.


[AS06900(ALL)08/95] Press the right (a) side of the “SEEK”button to select the next listenable station upthe frequency band. Press the left (b) side ofthe button to select the next listenable stationdown the frequency band. By holding thebutton down, listenable stations can bepassed over to reach the desired station.

*[AS07000(ALL)02/96] ❑Using the “SCAN” function (Stereo CassetteRadio)

*[AS07025(ALL)02/96] Press the “SCAN” button to enter the scanmode. The radio will begin scanning up thefrequency band, stopping on each listenablestation for approximately a five-secondsampling. This continues until you press the“SCAN” button a second time.


%*[AS07030(ALL)06/96] Your radio is equipped with 5 stationmemory buttons. These buttons can be usedto select up to 5 preset AM stations and 10FM stations (5 in FM1 and 5 in FM2). Followthe easy steps below to set these buttons tothe desired frequencies.


51


*[AS07037(ALL)06/96] 2. Press one of the memory preset buttons andhold the button until the sound returns. Thatstation is now held in memory on thatbutton.


*[AS07045(ALL)06/96] NOTE: If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected,the clock and station memory presetbuttons (if programmed in auto mode)will need to be reset.

[AS07050(ALL)05/96] Using the Controls of Your Cassette TapePlayer (If equipped)

*[AS07075(ALL)08/95] How to insert a tape

*[AS07100(ALL)08/95] Insert a cassette (with the open edge to theright) firmly into the tape door opening, makingsure the cassette is completely in and “seated.”

*[AS07125(ALL)08/95] NOTE: A cassette tape can be loaded with theignition on whether or not the radiopower is on.

*[AS07150(ALL)12/95] How to locate a desired track on the tape

*[AS07175(ALL)08/95] ❑Using the Automatic Music Search (“AMS”)

[AS07200(ALL)09/95] Press and hold the “AMS” button (“AMS”will appear in the display). Then, push theleft (h) button to rewind to the beginningof the current selection or press the right(g) button to fast forward to the beginningof the next selection.

*[AS07225(ALL)08/95] ❑How to change the side of the tape beingplayed

[AS07250(ALL)09/95] The alternate track (other side) of the tapecan be selected at any time by pushing bothfast-wind buttons (h and g) at thesame time.


52

*[AS07275(ALL)08/95] How to eject the tape

[AS07300(ALL)04/96] To stop the tape and eject the cassette, press the“i” button. The radio will resume playing.

*[AS07325(ALL)02/96] Using the DolbyH B noise reduction feature

*[AS07350(ALL)04/96] Push the k button to activate. Push again todeactivate.

*[AS07375(ALL)09/95] NOTE: Noise reduction system manufacturedunder license from Dolby LabsLicensing Corporation. “Dolby” anddouble-D symbol are trademarks ofDolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation.

*[AS07400(ALL)05/96] How to view the clock mode

*[AS07425(ALL)08/95] Press the “CLOCK” button to alternate thefrequency and time in the display. In the clockmode, pressing any radio function willautomatically display the radio frequency forapproximately ten seconds before changing backto the clock mode.

*[AS07450(ALL)05/96] How to set the clock

*[AS07475(ALL)05/96] 1. Turn the radio on.

*[AS07500(ALL)04/96] 2. Press and hold in the “CLOCK” button.Press the “SEEK” button left (b) to advancethe hours and right (a) to advance theminutes.

*[AS07525(ALL)05/96] NOTE: The clock displays 12-hour time withno AM/PM indications.


53

*[AS07550(ALL)05/96] Tips on Caring for the Cassette Player andTapes

*[AS07575(ALL)08/95] In order to keep your cassette tape playerperforming the way it was meant to, read andfollow these simple precautions:

*[AS07600(ALL)05/96] ❑Using a Ford or equivalent cassette cleaningcartridge to clean the tape player head after10-12 hours of play will help maintain thebest playback sound and proper tapeoperation.

*[AS07625(ALL)08/95] ❑Only cassettes that are 90 minutes long orless should be used. Tapes longer than 90minutes are thinner and subject to breakageor may jam the tape player mechanism.

*[AS07650(ALL)08/95] ❑Protect cassettes from exposure to directsunlight, high humidity and extreme heat orcold. If they are exposed to extremeconditions, allow them to reach a moderatetemperature before playing.

*[AS07675(ALL)08/95] ❑ If a tape is loose inside the cassette, tighten itbefore playing by putting your finger or apencil into one of the holes and turning thehub until the tape is tight.

*[AS07700(ALL)08/95] ❑Loose labels on cassette tapes can becomelodged in the mechanism. Remove any looselabel material before inserting a cassette.

*[AS07725(ALL)08/95] ❑Do not leave a tape in the cassette tapeplayer when not in use. High heat in thevehicle can cause the cassette to warp.


54

*[AS07730(ALL)08/95] Rear Seat Radio Controls

*[AS07735(ALL)08/95] Using the Rear Seat Radio Controls

[AS07740(ALL)05/96] Rear seat radio controls are available on someAerostar models.

[AS07745(ALL)08/95] The rear seat radio controls are located behindthe driver on the left hand side of the vehicle.These controls duplicate several radio functionsof the radio and allow the use of headphones inthe vehicle.

[AS07750(ALL)10/95]

one third page art:0060647-B

Rear seat radio controls

*[AS07755(ALL)06/95] How to turn the rear seat radio controls onand off

[AS07760(ALL)08/95] Press memory preset buttons “1” and “3”simultaneously on the face of your radio to turnthe rear seat radio controls on. A headphonessymbol (j) will appear in the display when therear seat controls are on. Press “1” and “3”simultaneously again to turn the rear seat radiocontrols off.


[AS07770(ALL)08/95] Press the right (+) side of the “VOLUME” rockerswitch to increase volume; and push the left (S)side to decrease the volume of the rear speakers.


55

[AS07775(ALL)08/95] NOTE: Rear seat control volume can be set nohigher than current radio setting unlessspeakers are turned off. See note underHow to turn the speakers on and off.

*[AS07780(ALL)06/95] Setting the AM or FM frequency band

*[AS07785(ALL)06/95] Push the “BAND” button to change thefrequency band.

*[AS07790(ALL)06/95] Using the “MEMORY” button

*[AS07795(ALL)06/95] Push the “MEMORY” button to access thestation you have set into memory button 1 onthe face of the radio. Successively pushing thisbutton will access, numerically, all stations setinto the Station Memory Preset buttons (1through 5).

*[AS07800(ALL)06/95] How to turn the speakers on and off

*[AS07805(ALL)06/95] When the rear seat controls are on, push the“SPKRS ON-OFF” button to turn all speakersoff. Push again to turn all speakers on.

[AS07810(ALL)09/95] NOTE: Turning the ignition off then on againwill not turn the speakers back on, ifpreviously turned off by the “SPKRSON-OFF” button on the rear seatcontrols.

*[AS07815(ALL)06/95] Using the “SEEK” function

[AS07820(ALL)08/95] Press the right (a) side of the “SEEK” rockerswitch to seek to the next radio station. Press theleft (b) side of the “SEEK” rocker switch toseek to the previous radio station.

*[AS07825(ALL)09/95] NOTE: When using the rear seat controls witha High-Level Audio System, the“SEEK” function on the rear seatcontrols will also function withcassettes, seeking the next (“SEEK a”)or previous (“b SEEK”) selection onthe tape.


56

*[AS07850(ALL)06/95] Using headphones with the rear seatcontrols

[AS07855(ALL)03/96] Two 3.5 mm headphone jacks have beenprovided on the rear seat controls. Plugheadphone(s) into the provided jack(s) tooperate.

*[AS07860(ALL)04/96] Common Radio ReceptionConditions

*[AS07865(ALL)05/96] Several conditions prevent FM reception frombeing completely clear and noise-free, such asthe following:

*[AS07870(ALL)05/96] 1. Distance/Strength

*[AS07875(ALL)05/96] The strength of the FM signal is directly relatedto the distance the signal must travel. Thelistenable range of an average FM signal isapproximately 25 miles (40 kilometers). Beyondthis distance, the radio is operating in a fringearea and the signal becomes weaker.

*[AS07880(ALL)08/95] NOTE: Always make sure your antenna(whether you have a power antenna ora manually adjustable antenna) is fullyextended to its maximum length forproper reception. If your antenna is notfully extended, you may experiencesignal loss while traveling in fringereception areas.

*[AS07885(ALL)05/96] 2. Terrain

*[AS07890(ALL)05/96] The terrain (hilly, mountainous, tall buildings) ofthe area over which the signal travels mayprevent the FM signal from being noise-free.

*[AS07895(ALL)05/96] If there is a building or large structure betweenthe antenna and station, some of the signal“bends” around the building, but certain spotsreceive almost no signal. Moving out of the


57

“shadow” of the structure will allow the stationto return to normal.

*[AS07900(ALL)05/96] When the radio waves are reflected off objects orstructures, the reflected signal cancels the normalsignal, causing the antenna to pick up noise anddistortion. Cancellation effects are mostprominent in metropolitan areas, but also canbecome quite severe in hilly terrain anddepressed roadways.

*[AS07905(ALL)05/96] To minimize these conditions, a stereo/monoblend circuit has been incorporated into thissystem. This feature automatically switches aweak stereo signal to a clearer monaural signal,which improves the quality of reception.

*[AS07910(ALL)05/96] Several sources of static are normal conditionson AM frequencies. These can be caused bypower lines, electric fences, traffic lights andthunderstorms.

*[AS07915(ALL)05/96] Another reception phenomenon is Strong SignalCapture and Overload. This can occur whenlistening to a weak station and when passinganother broadcast tower. The close station maycapture the more distant station, although thedisplayed frequency does not change. Whilepassing the tower, the station may switch backand forth a few times before returning to theoriginal station.

*[AS07920(ALL)05/96] When several broadcast towers are present(common in metropolitan areas), several stationsmay overload the receiver, resulting inconsiderable station changing, mixing anddistortion.

*[AS07925(ALL)05/96] Automatic gain control circuitry for both AMand FM bands has been incorporated into thissystem to reduce strong signal capture andoverload.


58

%*[AS07930(ALL)05/96] All About Radio Frequencies*[AS07935(ALL)05/96] The Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

and the Canadian Radio TelecommunicationsCommission (CRTC) establish the frequenciesthat AM and FM radio stations may use fortheir broadcasts. The allowable frequencies are,AM: 530, 540...1600, 1610 kHz in 10 kHz steps;FM: 87.9, 88.1...107.7, 107.9 MHz in 0.2 MHzsteps.

*[AS07940(ALL)05/96] Not all frequencies will be assigned to a givenarea. This radio will tune to each of thesefrequencies using manual tune and no finetuning is necessary as radio stations may not useother frequencies.

*[AS08175(ALL)05/96] Some FM radio stations advertise a“rounded-off” frequency which is not thefrequency they actually broadcast on. Forexample, a radio station that is assigned afrequency of 98.7 MHz may call itself “Radio 99”even though 99.0 MHz is not an allowable FMbroadcast frequency.

%*[AS08200(ALL)05/96] Important Warranty and ServiceInformation

*[AS08225(ALL)05/96] Warranty

*[AS08250(ALL)05/96] Your sound system is warranted for three yearsor 36,000 miles (60,000 kilometers), whichevercomes first. Consult your vehicle warrantybooklet for further information. Ask your dealerfor a copy of this limited warranty.

*[AS08275(ALL)05/96] Service

*[AS08300(ALL)05/96] At Ford, we stand behind our audio systemswith a comprehensive service and repairprogram. If anything should go wrong withyour Ford audio system, return to your dealerfor service. There is a nationwide network ofqualified Ford authorized repair centers to assistyou.


59

Controls and Features

%*[CF00050(ALL)01/96] The main controls for the climate control system,clock, and radio are on the instrument panel.

File:05cpcfa.exUpdate:Mon Jun 24 08:10:35 1996

60

[CF00060(ALL)05/96]

fullpageart:0095042-C

Instru

men

tp

anel

and

controls

File:05cpcfa.exU

pdate:M

on Jun 24 08:10:35 1996

61

%*[CF00075(ALL)03/96] NOTE: Any cleaner or polish that increases thegloss (shine) of the upper part of theinstrument panel should be avoided.The dull finish in this area is to helpprotect the driver from undesirablewindshield reflection.

%*[CF00100(ALL)03/96] The Climate Control Systems

*[CF00110(ALL)03/96] Your vehicle is equipped with a controlassembly designed to handle either acombination A/C-Heater System or aHeater-Only System.

[CF00120(ALL)04/96] If your vehicle has a factory installed auxiliarysystem, the front control will be equipped with arear fan control switch. If it is a factory installedauxiliary system with rear A/C and/or rearheater functions, an auxiliary fan speed controlswitch is installed in the rear of the vehicle.

%*[CF00130(ALL)03/96] Instrument Panel Registers

*[CF00140(ALL)01/96] There are four registers in the instrument panel.Each of these registers contains a louverassembly which can be manually adjusted todirect airflow up, down, left and right. Anillustration of the register locations follows.

[CF00150(ALL)01/96]

quarter page art:0020098-E

Instrument panel registers


62

% [CF00160(ALL)04/96] Air Conditioner and Heater (If equipped)[CF00170(ALL)01/96] The control for your air conditioner and heater

system is located near the center of theinstrument panel and operates only when theignition key is turned to the ON position. Yourair conditioner and heater heats or cools yourvehicle interior depending on the function andthe temperature you select. The right knob is theSELECT knob which allows you to select heatingor cooling and determine where the air will bedirected. The TEMP knob setting determines thetemperature of the air that flows into thevehicle.

[CF00180(ALL)01/96]


Climate control knobs

[CF00190(ALL)01/96] To turn your air conditioner and heater systemon, rotate the SELECT knob to any positionexcept OFF. This will turn the fan on and allowsairflow into the vehicle.

*[CF00200(ALL)03/96] Temperature selection[CF00210(ALL)01/96] The TEMP knob is the rotating knob located at

the center of the control with tapered red andblue bands surrounding most of the knob. Thewide red part of the band (full right) is the heatarea. The wide blue area (full left) is the coolingtemperature area. Any position selected betweenfull right and full left will give a temperaturebetween the two extremes except in MAX A/C.


63

[CF00220(ALL)04/96] Fan speed adjustment

[CF00230(ALL)01/96] The left knob or upper left knob with the x isthe fan speed knob. Rotate the x knob to theright to increase fan speed and increase theamount of air entering the vehicle. Four fanspeed positions are available.

*[CF00240(ALL)01/96] Function selection

[CF00250(ALL)01/96] Use VENT to bring outside air through theinstrument panel registers. You can heat the airin this position by rotating the center knob intothe red area. The air cannot be cooled below theoutside temperature regardless of the TEMPknob setting.

[CF00260(ALL)01/96] Select NORM A/C to get refrigerated outside airthrough the instrument panel registers. TheNORM A/C position is used for cooling exceptwhen it is extremely hot or fast cooling of thevehicle is needed. Select MAX A/C for fastcooling and return to NORM A/C when you arecomfortable.

[CF00270(ALL)01/96] The MAX A/C position rapidly produces coolair to provide faster cooling of your vehicle. Thisis possible because cooler air is drawn frominside the passenger area and cooled againinstead of using warmer outside air. Use ofinside air makes the fan sound louder and isnormal when using MAX A/C. You cannotadjust the air temperature when operating inMAX A/C. If the airflow is too cold, selectNORM A/C and adjust the air temperature asdesired.

[CF00275(ALL)01/96] Airflow will be to the floor when FLR isselected. The air cannot be cooled in the FLRposition but can be heated by rotating the TEMPknob into the red area.


64

[CF00280(ALL)01/96] Select MIX to direct air to the floor andwindshield defrosters at the same time. If theoutside temperature is about 50˚F (9˚C) orwarmer, the air will also be dehumidified toremove moisture. This feature will help preventfogging in humid weather. The air can be cooledor heated.

[CF00290(ALL)01/96] Select V to obtain maximum airflow to thewindshield. Rotate the TEMP knob into the redarea for the air temperature required to defrost.When the outside temperature is about 50˚F(9˚C) or warmer, the air will be dehumidified toremove moisture. Rotate the x knob on the leftto increase the airflow.

*[CF00300(ALL)05/96] Operating Tips

[CF00320(ALL)04/96] The following tips help you get the mostsatisfaction from your air conditioner and heatersystem:

[CF00330(ALL)01/96] ❑ In humid weather, select V before startingyour engine. This helps prevent windshieldfogging. After a few minutes of operation,you may select another airflow position.

[CF00340(ALL)04/96] ❑To prevent humidity buildup inside yourvehicle, always drive with the air conditionerand heater system turned on.

*[CF00350(ALL)01/96] ❑Do not put objects under the front seats thatinterfere with the flow of air to the back seatarea.

*[CF00360(ALL)03/96] ❑Remove any snow, ice, or leaves from the airintake area at the bottom of the windshield.

[CF00370(ALL)01/96] ❑For maximum heating, rotate the functionselector knob to FLR, the temperature controlknob to the red (warm) range, and the fanknob to HI.


65

% [CF00380(ALL)04/96] Standard Heater

[CF00390(ALL)01/96] The control for your heater system is locatednear the center of the instrument panel andoperates only when the ignition key is turned tothe ON position. The heater heats and/orventilates your vehicle interior depending on thefunction and temperature you select. The rightknob is the SELECT knob which allows you toselect heating or ventilation and determinewhere the air will be directed. The TEMP knobsetting determines the temperature of the airthat flows into the vehicle.

[CF00400(ALL)01/96]


[CF00410(ALL)01/96]


Climate control knobs (heater only)


66

[CF00420(ALL)01/96] To turn the heater system on, rotate the SELECTknob to any position except OFF. This turns onthe fan and allows airflow into the vehicle.

*[CF00430(ALL)03/96] Temperature selection

[CF00440(ALL)01/96] The TEMP knob is the rotating knob located atthe center of the control with tapered red andblue bands surrounding most of the knob. Thewide red part of the band (full right) is the heatarea. The wide blue area (full left) is the coolarea. Any position selected between full rightand full left will give a temperature between thetwo extremes. The cool temperature you selectwill not be cooler than the outside temperature.

[CF00450(ALL)04/96] Fan speed adjustment

[CF00460(ALL)01/96] The left knob or upper left knob with the x isthe fan speed knob. Rotate the x knob to theright to increase fan speed and increase theamount of air entering the vehicle. Four fanspeed positions are available.

*[CF00470(ALL)01/96] Function selection

[CF00480(ALL)01/96] Use VENT to bring outside air through theinstrument panel registers. You can heat the airin this position by rotating the TEMP knob intothe red area. The air cannot be cooled below theoutside temperature regardless of the TEMPknob setting.

[CF00490(ALL)01/96] Airflow will be to the floor when FLR isselected. The air can be heated by rotating thetemperature knob into the red area.

[CF00500(ALL)04/96] Select MIX to get air to the floor and windshielddefrosters at the same time.

[CF00510(ALL)01/96] Select V to obtain maximum airflow to thewindshield. Rotate the TEMP knob into the redarea for the air temperature required to defrost.Rotate the x knob to increase or decrease theairflow.


67

*[CF00515(ALL)05/96] Operating Tips

*[CF00520(ALL)03/96] The following tips will help you to get the mostsatisfaction from your heater system.

[CF00530(ALL)01/96] ❑ In humid weather, select V before startingyour engine. This will help to preventwindshield fogging. After a few minutes, youmay select another airflow position.

*[CF00540(ALL)03/96] ❑To prevent humidity buildup inside yourvehicle, always drive with the heater systemturned on.

*[CF00550(ALL)01/96] ❑Do not put objects under the front seats thatinterfere with the flow of air to the back seatarea.

*[CF00560(ALL)03/96] ❑Remove any snow, ice, or leaves from the airintake area at the bottom of the windshield.

[CF00570(ALL)01/96] ❑For maximum heating, rotate the functionselector knob to FLR, the temperature controlknob to the red (warm) range, and the fanblower knob to HI.

% [CF00580(ALL)04/96] Auxiliary Heater and AirConditioner (If equipped)

[CF00590(ALL)04/96] If your vehicle is equipped with a factoryinstalled auxiliary unit (heater or heater/airconditioner), the front control assembly willinclude separate switches for FRONT and REARfan control. Fan speed for front and rear systemscan be set as desired by adjusting these switches.


68

[CF00600(ALL)01/96]


Front control assembly with rear blower knob

[CF00610(ALL)01/96] In addition, an auxiliary unit fan switch islocated on the left side of the vehicle in linewith the second row of seats.

[CF00620(ALL)01/96] To control the auxiliary unit fan speed with thisswitch, the rear fan switch on the front controlmust first be set at the REAR CONT (control)position.

[CF00630(ALL)01/96]


Rear mounted auxiliary fan switch


69

%*[CF00650(ALL)03/96] Rear Window Defroster(If equipped)

*[CF00660(ALL)03/96] The defroster for the rear window clears frost,fog, or thin ice from both the inside and outsideof the rear window.

*[CF00670(ALL)03/96] The control switch is located on the instrumentpanel to the right of the steering column.

[CF00680(ALL)01/96]


Rear window defroster switch

*[CF00690(ALL)03/96] To defrost the rear window:

*[CF00700(ALL)03/96] 1. Clear any snow or ice from the rearwindow.

*[CF00710(ALL)03/96] 2. Get in your vehicle and start the engine.

[CF00720(ALL)04/96] 3. Press the switch. The indicator light will turnon.

[CF00730(ALL)04/96] The defroster turns off automatically afterapproximately 10 minutes. If the window is notclear, turn on the defroster again. It will alsoautomatically shut off any time the engine isshut off.


70

%*[CF00740(ALL)03/96] NOTE: Never use sharp instruments orwindow cleaners with abrasives toclean the inside of your rear window.If you do, you may damage the heatingelements that are bonded to the insideof the rear window and cause damageto the rear window defroster.

[CF00750(ALL)03/96] Rear Window Wiper andWasher (If equipped)

[CF00760(ALL)01/96] The rear window wiper control switch is locatedon the instrument panel to the right of thesteering column.

[CF00770(ALL)01/96] To wash and wipe the rear window:

[CF00780(ALL)01/96] 1. Push the top of the switch to turn on thewipers.

[CF00790(ALL)01/96] 2. Push and hold the WASH control switch fora constant spray.

[CF00800(ALL)01/96] 3. Release to the outer position. The spray willstop and the wipers will remain running.

[CF00810(ALL)01/96] 4. Push the top of the switch to stop thewipers.

[CF00820(ALL)01/96]


Rear window wiper/washer control button


71

%*[CF00830(ALL)03/96] The Interior and Exterior Lights%*[CF00840(ALL)03/96] Turning On the Exterior Lights

*[CF00850(ALL)01/96] To turn on your headlamps, parking lamps,marker lamps, license plate lamps and taillamps, use the headlamp switch to the left of thesteering column.

[CF00860(ALL)01/96]

half page art:0095063-A

Master lighting switch


72

%*[CF01060(ALL)03/96] Daytime Running Light System

*[CF01070(ALL)03/96] (Canadian vehicles only)

*[CF01080(ALL)03/96] The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system turnsthe high beam headlamps on, with a reducedlight output, when:

*[CF01090(ALL)03/96] ❑The headlamp system is in the OFF position,and

*[CF01100(ALL)01/96] ❑The vehicle is running, and

*[CF01110(ALL)03/96] ❑The vehicle has a fully released parkingbrake.

*[CF01120(ALL)01/96] NOTE: You may notice that the lights flickerwhen the vehicle is turned on or off.This is a normal condition.

*[CF01130(ALL)03/96]RWARNING

The Daytime Running Light (DRL) systemwill not illuminate the tail lamps andparking lamps. Turn on your headlampsat dusk. Failure to do so may result in acollision.

*[CF01140(ALL)01/96] Instrument Panel Illumination

*[CF01190(ALL)03/96] The instrument panel lights can be turned on bypulling the headlamp switch toward you toeither the first or outer position. You canbrighten or dim the instrument panel lights byrotating the headlamp switch knob.

% [CF01230(ALL)04/96] High-mount Brakelamp

[CF01235(ALL)01/96] The high-mount brakelamp is located above therear window on liftgate models, and on the roofabove the rear doors on dual rear door models.


73

[CF01240(ALL)05/96]

two third page art:0021014-B

High-mount brakelamp

%*[CF01250(ALL)01/96] Illuminated Entry System (If equipped)

[CF01260(ALL)01/96] If your vehicle is equipped with this option, theinterior courtesy lamps and dome lamp willlight when either outside front door handle israised. They will turn off automatically afterapproximately 25 seconds or when the ignitionkey is turned to ON or ACC.

*[CF01320(ALL)01/96] Radio

*[CF01330(ALL)01/96] For information about the radio in your vehicle,refer to the Electronic Sound Systems chapter inthis Owner Guide.


74

*[CF01340(ALL)01/96] Clock Controls on ElectronicRadios

[CF01345(ALL)04/96] The electronic radios have a built-in clock. Forcomplete operating instructions, refer to theElectronic Sound Systems chapter in this OwnerGuide.

*[CF02100(ALL)01/96] Ignition%*[CF02110(ALL)01/96] Understanding the Positions of the Ignition

*[CF02120(ALL)01/96]


The positions of the key in the ignition lock cylinder.

%*[CF02130(ALL)04/96] ACCESSORY allows some of your vehicle’selectrical accessories such as the radio and thewindshield wipers to operate while the engine isnot running.

*[CF02135(ALL)01/96] LOCK locks the steering wheel and gearshiftlever.

*[CF02140(ALL)01/96] LOCK is the only position that allows you toremove the key. The LOCK feature helps toprotect your vehicle from theft.

*[CF02150(ALL)01/96] If your key is stuck in the LOCK position andwill not turn, move your steering wheel left orright until the key turns freely.

*[CF02160(ALL)01/96] OFF allows you to shut off the engine and allaccessories without locking the steering wheel orthe automatic transmission gearshift lever.

*[CF02170(ALL)01/96] ON allows you to test your vehicle’s warninglights (except the brake system warning light) to


75

make sure they work before you start theengine. The key returns to the ON position oncethe engine is started and remains in this positionwhile the engine runs.

*[CF02180(ALL)01/96] START cranks the engine. Release the key oncethe engine starts so that you do not damage thestarter. The key should return to ON when yourelease it. The START position also allows youto test the brake warning light.

%*[CF02500(ALL)02/96] The Turn Signal Lever

*[CF02510(ALL)02/96] You can use the turn signal lever on the left sideof the steering column to:

*[CF02520(ALL)02/96] ❑operate the turn signals and cornering lamps

*[CF02530(ALL)03/96] ❑ turn the high beams on/off

*[CF02540(ALL)03/96] ❑ flash the lamps

*[CF02550(ALL)03/96] ❑ turn the windshield wipers and washeron/off

%*[CF02560(ALL)01/96] Turn Signals

[CF02570(ALL)01/96]


Turn signal operation

*[CF02580(ALL)08/95] If the turn indicator light in the instrumentpanel does not illuminate or remains on (doesn’tflash) when you signal a turn, the turn signalingsystem is malfunctioning. Have this condition


76

corrected as soon as possible, but make sure thatyou use the accepted hand signals in themeantime.

*[CF03200(ALL)08/95] High Beams and Flashing the Lamps

[CF03800(ALL)01/96]


Headlamp high beam and flash-to-pass operation

%*[CF04400(ALL)01/96] Windshield Wipers and Washer

*[CF04500(ALL)04/96] To turn on the windshield wipers, the ignitionkey must be turned to the ON or ACC position.

[CF04950(ALL)01/96]


Interval wiper on turn signal lever — wiper and washeroperation

*[CF05000(ALL)08/95] To set the interval wipers, rotate the knob at theend of the turn signal lever toward or awayfrom the instrument panel to the intervaloperation you desire.


77

*[CF05200(ALL)01/96] To clean the windshield, push in the end of thewiper knob. For a constant spray, keep the knobpushed in. After you release the knob, thewipers operate for two to three cycles beforeturning off (if wipers were off) or returning tothe selected setting.

[CF05250(ALL)01/96] NOTE: The addition of bug shields to thefront of the vehicle (e.g., shields) mayadversely affect the windshield washersystem from delivering fluid to thewindshield. Devices such as shields arenot recommended for your Fordvehicle.

*[CF05300(ALL)08/95] Do not try to clean the windshield when thewasher fluid container is empty or activate thewashers at any time for more than 15 secondscontinuously. This could damage the washerpump system.


Always warm up the windshield with thedefroster before you use the washer fluid.In freezing weather, the washer solutionmay freeze on the windshield and obscureyour vision.

*[CF05450(ALL)03/96] For information about refilling the washer fluidor replacing your windshield wiper blades, seeWindshield washer fluid and Wipers in the Index.

%*[CF05475(ALL)01/96] Gearshift Lever[CF05495(ALL)03/96] The gearshift lever on your Aerostar is mounted

on the steering column. On the end of thegearshift lever is the OVERDRIVE OFF button.For additional information about the gearshiftlever and the OVERDRIVE OFF button, see theDriving chapter.


78

[CF05500(ALL)01/96]


Overdrive off button

[CF05504(ALL)01/96] OVERDRIVE OFF Light on GearshiftLever

[CF05508(ALL)01/96] This light indicates the operating range of thetransmission. The word OFF illuminates on thelever when the OVERDRIVE OFF button isdepressed.

%*[CF05530(ALL)05/96] Hazard Flasher Switch

*[CF05540(ALL)05/96] The hazard flasher switch is located on the topof the steering column. For more information,refer to Hazard Flasher in the Roadside Emergencieschapter.

[CF05575(ALL)05/96]

quarter page art:0095077-A

Hazard flasher


79

%*[CF06200(ALL)05/96] Tilt Steering (If equipped)


Never adjust the steering wheel when thevehicle is moving.

[CF06500(ALL)01/96]

one third page art:0020089-C

Turn signal and tilt steering release lever

*[CF06750(ALL)01/96] To change the position of the steering wheel,pull the release lever on the column toward you.Tip the steering wheel to the desired position.Release the lever to lock the steering wheel inplace.

*[CF07250(ALL)01/96] Be sure the steering wheel locks in a notch. It isnot infinitely adjustable. Do not adjust thesteering wheel while the vehicle is in motion.


80

%*[CF07300(ALL)03/96] Speed Control (If equipped)[CF07700(ALL)01/96]


Speed control switches on the steering wheel

%*[CF07800(ALL)05/96] To Turn Speed Control Off

[CF07900(ALL)03/96] Press OFF

[CF07950(ALL)03/96] OR

[CF08000(ALL)03/96] Turn off the vehicle ignition.

*[CF08100(ALL)05/96] Once speed control is switched off, thepreviously programmed set speed will be erased.

*[CF08150(ALL)05/96] To Turn Speed Control On

[CF08200(ALL)03/96] Press ON

*[CF08250(ALL)05/96] To Set A Speed

[CF08300(ALL)03/96] Press the SET ACCEL. For speed control tooperate, the speed control must be ON and thevehicle speed must be greater than 30 mph(km/h).

[CF08350(ALL)03/96] If you drive up or down a steep hill, yourvehicle speed may vary momentarily slower orfaster than the set speed.

*[CF08400(ALL)05/96] Speed control cannot reduce the vehicle speed ifit increases above the set speed on a downhill. Ifyour vehicle speed is faster than the set speedwhile driving on a downhill in j (Overdrive),


81

you may want to shift to the next lower gear toreduce your vehicle’s speed.

[CF08450(ALL)03/96] If your vehicle slows down more than 10 mph(16 km/h) below your set speed on an uphill,your speed control will disengage. PressingRESUME will re-engage it.


Do not use the speed control in heavytraffic or on roads that are winding,slippery, or unpaved.

*[CF08800(ALL)05/96] To Set a Higher Set Speed

[CF08900(ALL)03/96] Press and hold SET ACCEL. Release the switchwhen the desired vehicle speed is reached.

[CF08950(ALL)03/96] OR

[CF08970(ALL)03/96] Press and release SET ACCEL. Each press willincrease the set speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

[CF08975(ALL)03/96] OR

*[CF09000(ALL)05/96] You may accelerate with the accelerator pedal atany time during speed control usage. Releasingthe accelerator pedal will return your vehiclespeed to the previously programmed set speed.

*[CF09100(ALL)05/96] To Set a Lower Set Speed

[CF09200(ALL)03/96] Press and hold COAST. Release the switch whenthe desired speed is reached.

[CF09220(ALL)03/96] OR

[CF09260(ALL)03/96] Press and release COAST. Each press willdecrease the set speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

[CF09280(ALL)03/96] OR

[CF09300(ALL)03/96] Depress the brake pedal. When the desiredvehicle speed is reached, press SET ACCEL.


82


Do not shift the transmission into N(Neutral) with the speed control on.

*[CF09400(ALL)05/96] To Disengage Speed Control

[CF09500(ALL)03/96] Depress the brake pedal.

*[CF09600(ALL)05/96] Disengaging the speed control will not erase thepreviously programmed set speed.

*[CF09700(ALL)05/96] To Return to a Set Speed

[CF09800(ALL)03/96] Press RESUME. For RESUME to operate, thevehicle speed must be faster than 30 mph(48 km/h).

*[CF11950(ALL)05/96] Use of radio transmitting equipment that is notFederal Communications Commission (FCC) orin Canada the Canadian Radio andTelecommunications Commission (CRTC)approved may cause the speed control tomalfunction. Therefore, use only properlyinstalled FCC (CRTC in Canada) approved radiotransmitting equipment in your vehicle.

[CF13000(ALL)05/96] Dome/Map/Reading Lamps(If equipped)

[CF13020(ALL)05/96]


Map lamps


83

*[CF13030(ALL)01/96] The map lamps are located inside the domelamp assembly, on each side of the dome lamp.Each lamp has its own switch.

[CF13100(ALL)01/96] The front dome lamp, cargo lamp and stepwelllamp, if so equipped, will operate as courtesylamps when either of the front doors, side cargodoor, liftgate or dual rear door is opened.

[CF13130(ALL)05/96]


Rear cargo lamp

*[CF20501(ALL)05/96] Your vehicle has a variety of features designedfor your comfort, convenience and safety. Readthis chapter to find out about standard andoptional features.


84

%*[CF20601(ALL)02/96] Doors

*[CF20701(ALL)01/96] Door Handles and Locks

[CF21000(ALL)05/96]

half page art:0020178-C

Inside handles

[CF21401(ALL)05/96]


Outside handles and locks


85

%*[CF21409(ALL)04/96] Anti-theft front door lock knobs

*[CF21901(ALL)01/96] Anti-theft lock knobs are designed to precludeunlocking the door by pulling up on the bullettype lock knob. To unlock and open the frontdoor from the inside of the vehicle, pull on theinside door handle.

*[CF23801(ALL)01/96] Sliding Door

[CF23901(ALL)01/96] With the door unlocked, unlatch the sliding doorby pulling the inside handle to the rear, or bypulling the outside handle out and rearward. Toclose, push the inside handle forward or pull theoutside handle forward.

[CF24101(ALL)01/96]


Sliding door handles

% [CF24300(ALL)04/96] Liftgate

*[CF24301(ALL)01/96] Liftgate opening procedure

[CF24401(ALL)01/96] 1. Insert the key into the lock and turn itcounterclockwise. You can also unlock thelatch (but not release it) with the power doorlock system (if equipped).

*[CF24500(ALL)01/96] 2. Reach under the license plate light shieldand release the liftgate latch by squeezingthe paddle handle rearward.

[CF24600(ALL)01/96] 3. To make the gate swing up to the fullyopened position, pull back and upward onthe latch paddle handle.


86

[CF24800(ALL)01/96]


Opening the liftgate

[CF25300(ALL)04/96] Make certain that you close the liftgate door andwindow before driving your vehicle. If you donot, possible damage may occur to the liftgatedoor lift cylinders and attaching hardware.


Make sure that the liftgate door and/orwindow are closed to prevent exhaustfumes from being drawn into the vehicle.This will also prevent passengers andcargo from falling out. If you must drivewith the liftgate door or window open,keep the vents open so outside air comesinto the vehicle.

*[CF25500(ALL)01/96] Liftgate closing procedure

*[CF25600(ALL)01/96] 1. To make the liftgate swing downward, reachup and pull the lower edge of the liftgate (orthe loop handle on the inner trim panel ofvehicles with this option) and pulldownward.

*[CF25700(ALL)01/96] 2. When you have pulled down the liftgateenough so that you can reach the licenseplate light shield, push the shield down andforward to close the latch and liftgate. Atthis point, the latch is not locked.


87

[CF25800(ALL)01/96] 3. You can lock the liftgate latch by pushingdown the lock button before you pull downand close the liftgate. You can also lock theliftgate latch by inserting your vehicle’s doorkey and turning it clockwise after you haveclosed the liftgate, or by using the powerdoor locks (if equipped).

*[CF25900(ALL)01/96] The liftgate area is only intended for cargo, notpassengers. You can open and close the liftgatefrom outside the vehicle. It cannot be openedfrom inside the cargo area.

[CF28800(ALL)01/96] Dual Rear Cargo Door (If equipped)

[CF29300(ALL)01/96]


Opening the right rear door

[CF29400(ALL)01/96] To open the left rear door, open the right reardoor and then pull up on the tee-shaped handlelocated on the inside of the left rear door.


88

[CF29700(ALL)01/96] When closing the dual rear cargo doors,remember to close the left rear door first.

[CF29801(ALL)04/96]RWARNING

Do not operate your vehicle with the reardouble doors open.

%*[CF30100(ALL)01/96] Power Door Locks (If equipped)

[CF30200(ALL)01/96] The power door lock switches are located in thefront doors. To lock all doors push the switchmarked LOCK. To unlock all doors push theswitch marked UNLOCK.

[CF30300(ALL)04/96] Memory lock (sliding door)

[CF30401(ALL)01/96] Your vehicle has a sliding door memory lockfeature that does not require the sliding door tobe closed before using the power locks. Thelocking function will activate after the door isclosed.

*[CF30701(ALL)01/96] The manual door locks will override the powerdoor lock controls.


89

[CF30801(ALL)01/96]

quarter page art:0020201-C

Power door lock controls

%*[CF31000(ALL)04/96] Windows[CF31500(ALL)03/96] Sliding side windows

[CF31510(ALL)06/96] To open or close the sliding side windows,follow the instructions listed below.

[CF31520(ALL)06/96] Opening the sliding window

[CF31530(ALL)06/96] 1. To open the window, pull the rear portionof the latch handle rearward.

[CF31540(ALL)06/96] 2. Slide the window open.

[CF31545(ALL)06/96] Closing the sliding window

[CF31550(ALL)06/96] 1. To close the window, push the latch handletoward the front of the vehicle.

[CF31560(ALL)06/96] 2. Slide the window forward to engage thelatch handle on the striker.


90

[CF31600(ALL)05/96]

one third page art:0020207-E

Opening the sliding side window

%*[CF31700(ALL)01/96] Using the Power Windows (If equipped)

[CF31800(ALL)01/96] Each front door has a power control that opensand closes the window on that door. Thedriver’s door has a master control switch thatoperates both front door windows. You mustplace the ignition switch in the ON or ACCposition to use your power window controls.


Make sure that the liftgate door and/orwindow are closed to prevent exhaustfumes from being drawn into the vehicle.This will also prevent passengers andcargo from falling out. If you must drivewith the liftgate door or window open,keep the vents open so outside air comesinto the vehicle.


Do not let children play with the powerwindows.


91

[CF32100(ALL)01/96]


Power window controls — driver-side shown

%*[CF50000(ALL)03/96] Mirrors[CF54100(ALL)01/96] For vehicles without rear door windows, the

right-hand side mirror is a flat glass mirror. Allother vehicles have convex right-hand side viewmirrors. Convex mirrors have a curved surfaceand will show a wider view of the lane next toand behind your vehicle.


The right side view mirror makes objectsappear smaller and farther away than theyactually are.

%*[CF54500(ALL)05/96] Dual Electric Remote Control Mirrors(If equipped)

*[CF54600(ALL)05/96] To adjust the remote controlled side mirrors:

[CF54700(ALL)01/96] 1. Locate the switch in the driver’s door trimpanel.

[CF54900(ALL)01/96] 2. Select the right or left mirror by moving thecenter switch to the left-hand or right-handposition. The midway position moves neitherthe left-hand or right-hand mirror.

[CF55100(ALL)01/96] 3. Press the appropriate side of the squaremarked by an arrow indicating the directionof adjustment.


92

[CF55300(ALL)01/96] 4. Return the center switch to the middleposition to keep the mirror in place.

[CF55800(ALL)01/96]


Power mirror control

*[CF55900(ALL)05/96] Do not clean the plastic housing of any electricmirror with gasoline or other petroleum-basedcleaning products.

%*[CF59400(ALL)01/96] Console

*[CF59500(ALL)01/96] Your vehicle may have a full console. The fullconsole has the features shown in the illustrationbelow.


93

[CF59900(ALL)01/96]


The features on the console

[CF65400(ALL)01/96] Garage Door Opener Storage

[CF65500(ALL)01/96] At the center of the console, a compartment isprovided for storage of a garage door openertransmitter. In its stored position, the transmittercan be activated by pressing on the compartmentdoor.

[CF65600(ALL)01/96] To install the transmitter:

[CF65700(ALL)01/96] 1. Push down on latch.

[CF65800(ALL)01/96] 2. Open door by moving hand towards front ofvehicle while maintaining pressure on latch(Figure 1).


94

[CF65900(ALL)01/96]


[CF66000(ALL)01/96] 3. Remove the backing from the self-adhesiveside of the VelcroTM (supplied with theconsole) and apply it to the back of yourtransmitter.

[CF66100(ALL)01/96] 4. Install your transmitter into thecompartment, making sure the actuatorbutton of your transmitter is in line with oneof the pegs on the door when the door isclosed (Figure 2).

[CF66200(ALL)01/96]



95

[CF66300(ALL)01/96] 5. Once the transmitter is installed, theactuation peg on the door in line with yourtransmitter button may need to be adjustedfor proper function. This can be done usingthe button height adjustment pegs (locatedon the compartment door). Add one peg at atime until pressing the door actuates thetransmitter button (Figure 3).

[CF66400(ALL)01/96]


[CF66500(ALL)01/96] 6. By properly adjusting the actuation pegheight, you will be able to actuate yourgarage door by pressing the door as shown(Figure 4).

[CF66600(ALL)01/96]



97

Seating and SafetyRestraints

%*[SS00102(ALL)05/96] Seats%*[SS00105(ALL)01/96] Adjusting the Front Seat Manually

[SS00110(ALL)01/96] You can move the driver seat forward orbackward. If your vehicle is equipped with theoptional reclining bucket seat, you can also tiltthe seatback up to 30 degrees rearward.

[SS00115(ALL)01/96] The front passenger seat cannot be adjusted.

[SS00120(ALL)01/96]


Seat adjustment levers

*[SS00125(ALL)05/96]RWARNING

Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatbackwhen the vehicle is moving.


Do not pile cargo higher than theseatbacks to avoid injuring people in acollision or sudden stop.

File:06cpssa.exUpdate:Thu Jun 13 08:56:07 1996

98


Always drive and ride with your seatbackupright and the lap belt snug and lowacross the hips.


Children should always ride with theseatback in the fully upright position.

*[SS00145(ALL)08/95] To move the seat forward or backward:

[SS00150(ALL)01/96]


*[SS00155(ALL)08/95] To recline the seatback:

[SS00160(ALL)01/96]



99

[SS00165(ALL)01/96] E-Z Access Operation — Passenger SideRear Captain’s Chair (Optional QuadBuckets)

[SS00170(ALL)01/96] To provide easy access to the rear of the vehicle,the passenger side rear captain’s chair can betilted forward.

*[SS00175(ALL)01/96] To tilt seat forward:

*[SS00180(ALL)01/96] 1. Put the seatback in the upright position.

[SS00185(ALL)01/96] 2. Lift upward on the lower handle on theright (outboard) side of the seat.

*[SS00190(ALL)01/96] 3. The seat can now be tilted forward.

*[SS00195(ALL)01/96] To latch the seat in its normal position, pushseatback rearward until it is latched in position.

% [SS00200(ALL)04/96] Quick Release Rear Captain Chairs

[SS00205(ALL)04/96] To remove:

[SS00210(ALL)01/96] 1. For right hand seats, lift and rotate the seatlatch handle (located under the seat)rearward, causing the J hook to disengagefrom the front floor well retainer.

[SS00215(ALL)01/96] For left hand seats, lift and rotate the seatlatch handle (located under the seat)rearward, causing the J hook to disengagefrom the front floor well retainer. Disengagethe lap/shoulder safety belt from the seat byinserting a key or similar device into the slotin the detachable anchor and lifting upward.Stow the tongue end of the detachableanchor as shown.

[SS00220(ALL)01/96] 2. Push the seat assembly rearward todisengage the front and rear floor hooks andlift the seat assembly from the vehicle.


100

[SS00225(ALL)04/96] To install the rear bucket seat:

[SS00230(ALL)01/96] 1. Lift the seat assembly into the vehicle anddrop the front and rear floor hooks into thefloor wells at a point just behind the floorattachment pins.

[SS00235(ALL)01/96] 2. Rotate the seat latch handle forward, causingthe J hook to engage over the front of theforemost well retainer.

[SS00240(ALL)01/96] 3. For right hand seats, continue rotating theseat latch handle until it comes to acomplete stop on the top of the tube. Thiswill cause the seat assembly to slide forward,engaging the front and rear floor hooks withthe floor well retainers.

[SS00245(ALL)01/96] For left hand seats, push the seat latchhandle downward to a full stop. This locksthe seat in position. Before you engage thesafety belt, be sure it is not twisted. Removeany twist, then insert the tongue end of thedetachable anchor into the detachable anchoruntil you hear a “snap” and feel the latchengage.


Check to see that the seat and seatbackare latched securely in position. Keepfloor area free of objects that wouldprevent proper seat engagement. Neverattempt to adjust the seat while thevehicle is in motion.

[SS00255(ALL)05/96] Two and Three Passenger Bench Seats andSeat Bed Assemblies (If Equipped)

[SS00260(ALL)01/96] NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with aBuilt-In Child Seat, make sure thechild seat is properly stowed beforeoperating the seat bed.


101

*[SS00265(ALL)01/96] To remove seat assembly:

[SS00270(ALL)04/96] 1. Disengage the lap/shoulder safety belt fromthe seat by inserting a key or screwdriverinto the slot in the detachable anchor andlifting upward. Stow the tongue end of thedetachable anchor as shown in theillustration.

[SS00275(ALL)01/96]

three fourths page art:0095047-A

Location of the detachable anchor warning label on safetybelt


102

[SS00280(ALL)01/96]


Rear seat shoulder safety belt — stowage (with seatremoved)


103


When reinstalling a rear seat in yourvehicle it must be placed in its originalposition. Improper installation of the seatwill prevent correct use of the safety beltsand could increase the risk of injury.Refer to the warning label on the seatbelt.

[SS00300(ALL)01/96] 2. Fold the seatback forward and latch it in thedown position (bench seat only).

[SS00305(ALL)01/96] 3. Rotate the seat latch handles (located underthe seat near the floor) upward, causing thelatch hooks to disengage from the floorattachment.

[SS00310(ALL)01/96] 4. Lift seat at rear and rotate about the forwardattachment. When seat latches are clear offloor attachments, release the latch handles.

[SS00315(ALL)01/96] 5. Pull the seat rearward to disengage it fromthe front floor pins.

*[SS00320(ALL)01/96] Be careful that the latches are not damagedwhen the seats are stored.

*[SS00325(ALL)01/96] To install the seat assembly:

*[SS00330(ALL)01/96] 1. Clear the area of debris around the seat floorattachments.

[SS00335(ALL)01/96] 2. With the seatback in a folded and latchedposition (bench seat only), place the seatassembly in your vehicle and engage thefront seat hooks onto the forward attachmentpin in the floor wells.

*[SS00340(ALL)01/96] 3. Rotate the seat downward and engage thelatch into the rear floor attachment. Liftingof the latch handles is not required forinstallation.


104

*[SS00345(ALL)01/96] 4. Ensure that the latch handles are fully seatedin the down position.

[SS00350(ALL)01/96] 5. Before you engage the safety belt, be sure itis not twisted. A twisted safety belt maycause the retractor to work improperly.Remove any twist, then insert the tongueend of the detachable anchor into thedetachable anchor until you hear a “snap”and feel the latch engage. Refer to theprevious illustration.

[SS00355(ALL)01/96] The two passenger bench or bed seat must beinstalled in the first row behind the front seatson wagons with seven passenger seating.

*[SS00360(ALL)01/96] To fold down the rear seatback:

[SS00365(ALL)01/96] To lower the rear seatback down to its cargo orbed position, release the seatback latch bymoving the release lever forward for the benchseat or upward for the seat bed. Then fold theseatback down. The latch will re-engage in thecargo position.

[SS00370(ALL)01/96] To raise the seatback, release the seatback latchand rotate the seatback upwards until the latchre-engages. (A slight downward pressure on thebench seat seatback will reduce effort on thelatch.)


105

[SS00375(ALL)01/96]


Installation and removal of the second and third passengerbed and bench seat


Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatbackwhen the vehicle is moving.


Always latch the vehicle seat to the floor,whether the seat is occupied or empty. Ifnot latched, the seat may cause injuryduring a sudden stop.


Before using the seat, make sure that thelatch hooks are securely locked around thefloor pins.


106

% [SS00395(ALL)04/96] Seat/bed conversion (If Equipped)

[SS00400(ALL)01/96] Vehicles equipped with the seat/bed can beeither a two passenger or three passenger seat.

[SS00405(ALL)04/96] To convert the seat/bed to a bed:

[SS00410(ALL)01/96] 1. Pull up the release lever located on righthand side of the seat, and at the same timepush the seatback rearward.

[SS00415(ALL)01/96] 2. Push the top of the seatback down until itlatches.

[SS00420(ALL)01/96] The two passenger seat cushion will moveforward when going from the seat to the bedposition.

[SS00425(ALL)04/96] To convert the bed to a seat:

[SS00430(ALL)04/96] 1. While in front of the seat, pull the releaselever up and at the same time pull theseatback up. Raise the seatback to the fullupright and locked position.

*[SS00435(ALL)01/96] 2. Make sure the safety belts are free andavailable for use.

[SS00440(ALL)04/96]RWARNING

The seat/bed should not be occupiedwhile the vehicle is moving unless it is inthe upright, fully-latched position.

%*[SS00445(ALL)05/96] Using the Lumbar Support and SideBolsters

[SS00450(ALL)05/96] Adjusting the Lumbar Support (If equipped)

[SS00455(ALL)05/96] To adjust the lumbar pad, turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise.


107

[SS00460(ALL)05/96]

half page art:0020244-D

Manual lumbar knob

% [SS00495(ALL)04/96] Underseat Stowage Drawer(If equipped)

[SS00500(ALL)01/96] If your vehicle is equipped with the frontpassenger seat drawer, open it by moving thelatch lever upward and pulling the drawertoward the front of the vehicle. To remove thedrawer, pull past the stop tab on the back of thedrawer.


108

[SS00505(ALL)01/96]


Underseat stowage drawer — RH front passenger seat only

%*[SS00550(ALL)02/96] Important Safety Belt Information

*[SS00600(ALL)05/96] The use of safety belts helps to restrain you andyour passengers in case of a collision. In moststates and in Canada, the law requires their use.

*[SS00700(ALL)02/96] Safety belts provide best restraint when:

*[SS00800(ALL)02/96] ❑ the seatback is upright

*[SS00900(ALL)02/96] ❑ the occupant is sitting upright (not slouched)

*[SS01000(ALL)02/96] ❑ the lap belt is snug and low on the hips

*[SS01100(ALL)02/96] ❑ the shoulder belt is snug against the chest

*[SS01200(ALL)02/96] ❑ the knees are straight forward

*[SS01700(ALL)02/96] To help you remember to fasten your safety belt,a warning light may come on and a chime maysound. See Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime inthe Instrumentation chapter.


109

*[SS02100(ALL)02/96] See the following sections in this chapter fordirections on how to properly use these safetybelts. Also see Safety Restraints for Children in thischapter for special instructions about usingsafety belts for children.


Always drive and ride with your seatbackupright and the lap belt snug and lowacross the hips.


Each seating position in your vehicle has aspecific safety belt assembly which ismade up of one buckle and one tonguethat are designed to be used as a pair. 1)Use the shoulder belt on the outsideshoulder only. Never wear the shoulderbelt under the arm. 2) Never swing itaround your neck over the insideshoulder. 3) Never use a single belt formore than one person.




Never drive or ride with a twisted orjammed safety belt. If you cannot untwistor unjam the safety belt, see the nearestqualified technician immediately.


110


Never let a passenger hold a child on hisor her lap while the vehicle is moving.The passenger cannot protect the childfrom injury in a collision.


Lock the doors of your vehicle beforedriving to lessen the risk of the doorcoming open in a collision.

%*[SS03000(ALL)02/96] Combination Lap and ShoulderBelts

*[SS03200(ALL)02/96] While your vehicle is in motion, the combinationlap and shoulder belt adjusts to your movement.However, if you brake hard, turn hard, or ifyour vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph(8 km/h) or more, the lap/shoulder belt locksand helps reduce your forward movement.

*[SS03400(ALL)01/96] After you get into your vehicle, close the doorand lock it. Then adjust the seat to the positionthat suits you best.

*[SS03500(ALL)02/96] Pull the combination lap/shoulder belt from theretractor so that the shoulder portion of the beltcrosses your shoulder and chest. Be sure the beltis not twisted. If it is, remove the twist. Insertthe belt tongue into the proper buckle until youhear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure thetongue is securely fastened to the buckle bypulling on tongue.


111

*[SS03600(ALL)01/96]


Fastening the front seat combination lap and shoulder belt

[SS03650(ALL)04/96] NOTE: Be sure to read and understandImportant Safety Belt Information atthe beginning of this chapter.

[SS03800(ALL)01/96]


Unfastening the combination lap and shoulder belts —front and rear outboard seating positions

*[SS03900(ALL)02/96] While the belt retracts, guide the tongue to itsoriginal position to prevent it from striking youor the vehicle.

*[SS04000(ALL)01/96] Safety Belts for Front Outboard Passengerand Rear Outboard Seating Positions

*[SS04210(ALL)01/96] Your vehicle is equipped with a dual lockingmode retractor on the shoulder belt portion ofthe combination lap/shoulder safety belt for thefront seat outboard passenger and rear outboardpassengers.


112

*[SS04220(ALL)02/96] Dual locking mode retractors operate in twoways:

*[SS04230(ALL)02/96] Vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode

*[SS04240(ALL)02/96] In this operating mode, the shoulder beltretractor will allow the occupant freedom ofmovement, locking tight only on hard braking,hard cornering or impacts of approximately5 mph (8 km/h) or more. The retractor can alsobe made to lock by pulling the belt out quickly.

%*[SS04250(ALL)02/96] Automatic locking mode

*[SS04260(ALL)01/96] In this operating mode, the shoulder beltretractor will be automatically locked and willremain locked when the combinationlap/shoulder safety belt is buckled, and does notallow the occupant freedom of movement. Thismode provides the following:

*[SS04270(ALL)01/96] ❑A tight lap/shoulder belt on the occupant.

*[SS04280(ALL)01/96] ❑Child safety seat installation.

*[SS04300(ALL)01/96] This mode must be used when installing a childsafety seat on the front passenger seat and rearoutboard seats where dual locking retractors areprovided.

*[SS04310(ALL)01/96] To switch the retractor from the emergencylocking mode to the automatic locking mode,perform the following steps:

*[SS04320(ALL)02/96] 1. Buckle the lap/shoulder combination belt.

*[SS04330(ALL)01/96] 2. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt andpull downward until all of the belt isextracted and, when allowed to retract, aclicking sound is heard. At this time, the beltretractor is in the automatic locking mode(child restraint mode).


113

*[SS04340(ALL)02/96] 3. A clicking sound will continue to be heardas the belt is allowed to retract. Thisindicates that the retractor is in theautomatic locking mode.

*[SS04350(ALL)02/96] NOTE: When the combination lap/shoulderbelt is unbuckled and allowed toretract completely, the retractor willswitch to the vehicle sensitive(emergency) locking mode. See thedetailed instructions under Safety Seatsfor Children in this chapter.

[SS04375(ALL)01/96] Two Passenger Bench or Bedseat(If Equipped)

[SS04400(ALL)04/96] In addition to anchorages in the floor and roofstructures, some rear safety belts have adetachable anchor mounted to the outboard sideof the rear seats. This should remain attached,except when removing the rear seats.

[SS04800(ALL)01/96] Disengaging rear seat safety belts for seatremoval

[SS04850(ALL)01/96] In order to remove the rear seat, the safety beltmust be disengaged from the seat. To disengagethe safety belt from the seat, insert a key orsmall screwdriver into the slot provided on thedetachable anchor. Then lift upward.


114

[SS05000(ALL)01/96]


Disengaging safety belt for rear seat removal

[SS05200(ALL)01/96] Whenever a rear seat has been removed, thetongue end of the detachable anchor must becorrectly stowed. See the following illustration.


115

[SS05300(ALL)01/96]


Rear seat shoulder safety belt — stowage (with seatremoved)


116


When reinstalling a rear seat in yourvehicle it must be placed in its originalposition. Improper installation of the seatwill prevent correct use of the safety beltsand could increase the risk of injury.Refer to the warning label on the seatbelt.

[SS05700(ALL)04/96] After installing the rear seat, make sure thesafety belt is not twisted before you insert it intothe detachable anchor. A twisted safety belt maycause the retractor to not work properly. Theninsert the detachable anchor tongue into thedetachable anchor until you hear a “click” andfeel the latch engage.

%*[SS06800(ALL)12/95] Lap Belts[SS07000(ALL)01/96] On the center seat of the rear three-passenger

seats you will find a lap-belt without a retractor.You must adjust the lap belt to fit snugly and aslow as possible around your hips. Do not wearthe lap belt around your waist.

[SS07400(ALL)05/96]


Fastening and unfastening the center rear occupant safetylap belts


117

*[SS07500(ALL)01/96] Pull the belt across your hips and insert thetongue into the correct buckle on your seatuntil you hear a snap and feel it lock. Make surethe buckle is securely fastened.

%*[SS07700(ALL)01/96] If you need to lengthen the belt, unfasten it andtip the belt tongue at a right angle to the belt.Pull the belt tongue over your lap until itreaches the buckle.

*[SS07800(ALL)01/96] If you need to shorten the belt, pull on the looseend of the webbing until the belt fits snugly.

[SS08600(ALL)05/96] To unfasten the belt, push the release button onthe buckle. This allows the tongue to unlatchfrom the buckle.


The lap belts should fit snugly and as lowas possible around the hips, not aroundthe waist.

%*[SS09600(ALL)02/96] Safety Belt Extension Assembly

*[SS09700(ALL)01/96] For some people, the safety belt may be tooshort even when it is fully extended. You canadd about eight inches (20 cm) to the belt lengthwith a safety belt extension assembly (partnumber 611C22). Safety belt extensions areavailable at no cost from your dealer.

*[SS09750(ALL)01/96] Use only extensions manufactured by the samesupplier as the safety belt. Manufactureridentification is located at the end of thewebbing on the label. Also, use the safety beltextension only if the safety belt is too short foryou when fully extended. Do not use extensionto change the fit of the shoulder belt across thetorso.


118

%*[SS09775(ALL)03/96] Safety Belt Maintenance

*[SS09795(ALL)02/96] Check the safety belt systems periodically tomake sure that they work properly and are notdamaged.


Failure to follow these instructions willaffect the performance of the safety beltsand increase the risk of personal injury.

%*[SS09805(ALL)05/96] All safety belt assemblies, including retractors,buckles, front seat belt buckle support assemblies(slide bar) (if equipped), shoulder belt heightadjusters (if equipped), child safety seat tetherbracket assemblies (if equipped), and attachinghardware, should be inspected after anycollision. Ford recommends that all safety beltassemblies used in vehicles involved in acollision be replaced. However, if the collisionwas minor and a qualified technician finds thatthe belts do not show damage and continue tooperate properly, they do not need to bereplaced. Safety belt assemblies not in useduring a collision should also be inspected andreplaced if either damage or improper operationis noted.

%*[SS09875(ALL)01/96] How to Untwist or Unjam a Safety BeltRetractor

*[SS09900(ALL)01/96] If you should jam the lap belt retractor byallowing the belt to retract when it is twisted,you can free the webbing with this procedure:

*[SS09925(ALL)01/96] 1. Pull on the belt with both hands to tighten iton the retractor spool.

*[SS09950(ALL)01/96] 2. Feed the belt back into the retractor until itis completely retracted. Repeat previous stepif necessary.


119

[SS09975(ALL)04/96] 3. Pull the belt out of its holder as far as it willgo and untwist the belt or remove the objectthat is jamming the belt. Let the belt retract.

*[SS09985(ALL)01/96] 4. Then, pull the belt out and let it retractseveral times to make sure that the beltworks properly.

[SS10000(ALL)01/96] For Twisted Rear Outboard CombinationLap and Shoulder Safety Belts —Detachable Anchor

[SS10020(ALL)01/96] Disengage the detachable anchor tongue fromthe detachable anchor, remove the twist andre-install the detachable anchor tongue end intothe detachable anchor until you hear a snap andfeel the latch engage.

[SS10040(ALL)04/96] Procedure to Correct a Twisted Safety Beltat the “D” Ring (if so equipped) Frontand/or Rear Outboard Seating Positions

[SS10060(ALL)04/96] NOTE: The restraint system shown in thefollowing figures may be different thanthe restraint system in your vehicle.However, use these figures and thisprocedure to correct a twisted safetybelt at any outboard seating positionthat has a “D” ring.


120

[SS10080(ALL)04/96]


*[SS10100(ALL)01/96] 1. Grasp the belt webbing at the “D” ring. SeeFigure 2.


121

[SS10120(ALL)04/96]


*[SS10140(ALL)01/96] 2. Rotate and fold the belt webbing over itselfas required to remove the twist.

*[SS10160(ALL)01/96] 3. Feed the folded portion of the belt throughthe “D” ring.

*[SS10180(ALL)01/96] 4. When completed, the safety belt should looklike Figure 3.


122

[SS10200(ALL)04/96]


%*[SS10300(ALL)05/96] Air Bag Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS)

*[SS10600(ALL)05/96] Important Air Bag Precautions

*[SS10700(ALL)05/96] Your vehicle is equipped with a supplementalrestraint system designed to work with thesafety belts to help protect you and your rightfront seat passenger in the event of certaincollisions described in the section “How Doesthe Air Bag Supplemental Restraint SystemWork?”


All occupants of the vehicle, including thedriver, should always wear their safetybelts, failure to do so may increase therisk of personal injury in the event of acollision.


123


Do not place objects or mount equipmenton or near the steering wheel or in frontof the passenger dashboard area that maycome into contact with an inflating airbag. Failure to follow these instructionsmay increase the risk of personal injury inthe event of a collision.


Do not attempt to service, repair, ormodify the air bag Supplemental RestraintSystem or its fuses. See your Ford orLincoln-Mercury dealer.


If you are close to an inflating air bag, itcould seriously injure you. Sit against theseatback and position your seat such thatit is as far back from the steering wheelas possible but still allows you toproperly control the vehicle.


124

[SS11100(ALL)05/96]


*[SS11300(ALL)05/96] Children and Air Bags

[SS11400(ALL)06/96] Children should be placed in the rear in anappropriate child safety seat that is properlysecured to the vehicle.


Children should always wear their safetybelts. Failure to follow these instructionsmay increase the risk of personal injury inthe event of a collision.


Rear-facing child seats and infant carriersshould never be placed in the front seats.


125

*[SS11650(ALL)05/96] NOTE: For additional important safetyinformation on the proper use of seatbelts, child seats, and infant seats,please read the entire Safety Restraintschapter in this owner guide.

%*[SS11700(ALL)05/96] How Does the Air Bag SupplementalRestraint System Work?

*[SS11800(ALL)05/96] The Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System isdesigned to activate when the vehicle sustainssufficient longitudinal (lengthwise) decelerationthat is equal to or greater than hitting animmovable barrier head on at a range of about8-14 mph (13-23 km/h). The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not meanthat something is wrong with the system.Rather, it means the forces were not of the typesufficient to cause activation.

*[SS11900(ALL)05/96] If the vehicle is in a moderate or severe frontalcollision, the system is activated and the air bagsinflate rapidly. After the air bag inflates, it willquickly deflate. After the air bag deployment,you may notice a smoke-like, powdery residueor smell the burnt propellant. This is normal.The residue may consist of cornstarch or talcumpowder (which is used to lubricate the air bag)or sodium compounds, such as sodiumcarbonates (e.g. baking soda) that result from thecombustion process that inflates the air bag.Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may bepresent which may irritate the skin and eyes, butnone of the residue is toxic. The Air BagSupplemental Restraint System will reduce, butnot eliminate all injuries in an accident.


Several air bag system components get hotafter inflation. Do not try to touch themafter inflation.


126

[SS12100(ALL)05/96]



The air bag will inflate only once. Thesystem is designed to function on aone-time-only basis. If the air bag isinflated, THE AIR BAG WILL NOTFUNCTION AGAIN AND MUST BEREPLACED IMMEDIATELY. If the airbag is not replaced, this will increase therisk of injury in a subsequent collision.

*[SS12300(ALL)05/96] The Air Bag Supplemental Restraint Systemconsists of:

*[SS12400(ALL)05/96] ❑driver and passenger air bag modules (whichinclude the inflators and air bags),

*[SS12500(ALL)05/96] ❑one or more impact and safing sensors,

*[SS12600(ALL)05/96] ❑a system diagnostic module,

*[SS12650(ALL)05/96] ❑a readiness light and tone,


127

*[SS12700(ALL)05/96] ❑and the electrical wiring which connects thecomponents.

*[SS12800(ALL)05/96] The diagnostic module monitors its own internalcircuits and the supplemental air bag electricalsystem readiness (including the impact sensors),the system wiring, the air bag system readinesslight, the air bag backup power and the air bagigniters.

*[SS12900(ALL)05/96] Determining if System Is Operational

*[SS13000(ALL)05/96] The Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System usesa readiness light and a tone to indicate thecondition of the system. The readiness light is inthe instrument cluster. When you turn theignition key to ON, this light will illuminate forapproximately six (6) seconds and then turn off.This indicates that the system is operatingnormally. NOTE: Routine maintenance of the airbag system is not required.

%*[SS13100(ALL)05/96] A problem with the system is indicated by oneor more of the following:

*[SS13200(ALL)05/96] ❑ the readiness light will either flash or stay lit,

*[SS13300(ALL)05/96] ❑ the readiness light will not light immediatelyafter ignition is turned on,

%*[SS13400(ALL)05/96] ❑a group of five beeps will be heard. The tonepattern will repeat periodically until theproblem and light are repaired.

*[SS13500(ALL)05/96] If any of these things happen, evenintermittently, have the Air Bag SupplementalRestraint System serviced at your Ford orLincoln-Mercury dealer immediately. Unlessserviced, the system may not function properlyin the event of a collision.


128

*[SS13600(ALL)05/96] Disposal of Air Bags and Air BagEquipped Vehicles

*[SS13700(ALL)05/96] For disposal of air bags or air bag equippedvehicles, see your local Ford or Lincoln-Mercurydealer. Air bags MUST BE disposed of byqualified personnel.

%*[SS14300(ALL)01/96] Safety Restraints for Children

*[SS14400(ALL)01/96] In the U.S. and Canada, you are required by lawto use safety restraints for children. If smallchildren ride in your vehicle — this generallyincludes children who are four years old oryounger and who weigh 40 pounds (18 kg) orless — you must put them in safety seats thatare made specially for children. Safety beltsalone do not provide maximum protection forthese children. Check your local and state lawsfor specific requirements.


Never let a passenger hold a child on hisor her lap while the vehicle is moving.The passenger cannot protect the childfrom injury in a collision.


To prevent the risk of injury, make surechildren sit where they can be properlyrestrained.


129


It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

*[SS14650(ALL)05/96] When possible, put children in the rear seat ofyour vehicle. Accident statistics suggest thatchildren are safer when properly restrained inthe rear seating positions than in the frontseating positions.


Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’sinstructions included with the safety seatyou put in your vehicle. If you do notinstall and use the safety seat properly,the child may be injured in a sudden stopor collision.


Safety belts and seats can become hot in avehicle that has been closed up in sunnyweather; they could burn a small child.Check seat covers and buckles before youplace a child anywhere near them.


Do not leave children, unreliable adults,or pets unattended in your vehicle.


130

%*[SS15900(ALL)01/96] Safety Seats for Children

*[SS16000(ALL)01/96] Use a safety seat that is recommended for thesize and weight of the child. Always follow thesafety seat manufacturer’s instructions wheninstalling and using the safety seat.

[SS16005(ALL)01/96] Most child safety seats can be used in thisvehicle only in vehicle seating positions withlap/shoulder belts. Any booster-type seat thatplaces the vehicle’s lap belt or shoulder beltaround a shield above and ahead of the child’ships should not be used in this vehicle. Thistype of safety seat could cause injury by tippingover the front edge of the vehicle seat during acollision.


The following instructions MUST BEFOLLOWED to reduce risk of injury froma safety seat tipping too far forward in asevere crash.

[SS16012(ALL)01/96] Install forward-facing child safety seats only invehicle seating positions equipped withlap/shoulder belts. Forward-facing convertiblesafety seats can be used in the center of thethree-passenger second row bench seat only if atop tether strap is used. Ford recommendsplacing forward-facing safety seats in the secondrow and using safetey seats with top tetherstraps for added protection.

[SS16015(ALL)01/96] For more information on top tether straps seeAttaching Safety Seats With Tether Straps in thischapter.

*[SS16025(ALL)05/96] When installing a child safety seat, be sure touse the correct safety belt buckle for that seatingposition, and make sure the tongue is securelyfastened in the buckle. For a shoulder/lap beltcombination with a sliding tongue, make surethe retractor is in the automatic locking mode.


131

*[SS16090(ALL)05/96] All child restraint systems are designed to besecured in vehicle seats by lap belts or by thelap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.


If you do not properly secure the safetyseat, the child occupying the seat may beinjured during a collision or sudden stop.An unsecured safety seat could also injureother passengers.



[SS25601(ALL)01/96] Installing Child Safety Seats inthe Front Seat and Rear OutboardSeating Positions

[SS25650(ALL)01/96] Your vehicle is equipped with a dual lockingmode retractor on the shoulder belt portion ofthe combination lap/shoulder safety belt for theright front seat passenger and rear outboardpassengers.

[SS25701(ALL)01/96] If you choose to install a child safety seat orinfant carrier in these seating positions:

[SS25750(ALL)01/96] 1. Position the child seat on the seat of thevehicle. In the front seat, adjust the vehicleseat as far rearward as possible.

[SS25801(ALL)01/96] 2. Pull down on the shoulder belt, then graspthe shoulder belt and lap belt together. SeeFigure 1.


132

[SS25900(ALL)01/96]


*[SS26000(ALL)01/96] 3. While holding the shoulder and lap beltportions together, route the tongue throughthe child seat according to the child seatmanufacturer’s instructions. See Figure 2. Besure the belt webbing is not twisted, andinsert the tongue into the buckle. SeeFigure 3.


133

[SS26100(ALL)01/96]


Routing the lap/shoulder belt

[SS26201(ALL)01/96]

half page art:0011240-B

Buckling the belt


134

*[SS26301(ALL)01/96] 4. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt andpull downward until all of the belt isextracted and a click is heard. At this time,the retractor is in the automatic lockingmode (child seat restraint mode). SeeFigure 4.

[SS26401(ALL)01/96]


Setting the retractor to automatic locking mode

*[SS26500(ALL)02/96] 5. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder webbing. A clicking sound will beheard as the belt retracts. This indicates theretractor is in the automatic locking mode.Push down on the child seat while you pullup on the belt to remove any slack in thebelt. See Figures 5 and 6.


135

[SS26601(ALL)01/96]


[SS26700(ALL)01/96]



136

*[SS26801(ALL)02/96] 6. Before placing the child in the child seat,forcibly tilt the seat from side to side, andtug it forward to make sure that the seat issecurely held in place. See Figure 7.

[SS26900(ALL)01/96]


Checking that the seat is secure

*[SS27000(ALL)02/96] 7. Double check that the retractor is in theautomatic locking mode. Try to pull morebelt out of the retractor. If you cannot, thebelt is in the automatic locking mode. SeeFigure 8.


137

[SS27100(ALL)01/96]


Checking the retractor

*[SS27201(ALL)01/96] 8. Check to make sure that the child seat isproperly secured prior to each use. If theretractor is not locked, repeat steps 4through 7.

*[SS27205(ALL)01/96] NOTE: To remove the retractor from automaticlock mode, allow seat belt to retractfully to its stowed position and theretractor will automatically switch backto the vehicle sensitive locking modefor normal adult usage.




138

[SS27300(ALL)01/96] Installing Child Safety Seats atthe Rear Center Seating Positionwith Locking Adjustable Lap Belt

[SS27350(ALL)01/96] DO NOT install a forward-facing child safetyseat in the third row center seating position.Forward-facing seats must be installed with alap/shoulder belt, or a lap belt and top tetherstrap.

[SS27400(ALL)01/96] 1. Lengthen the lap belt. To lengthen the belt,hold the tongue so that its bottom isperpendicular to the direction of webbingwhile sliding the tongue toward the looseend of webbing.

*[SS27450(ALL)01/96] 2. Place the child safety seat in the centerseating position.

*[SS27500(ALL)01/96] 3. Route the tongue and webbing through thechild seat according to the child seatmanufacturer’s instructions.

*[SS27550(ALL)01/96] 4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper bucklefor the center seating position until you heara snap and feel it latch. Make sure thetongue is securely fastened to the buckle bypulling on tongue.

*[SS27600(ALL)01/96] 5. Push down on the child seat while pullingon the loose end of the lap belt webbing totighten the belt.

*[SS27650(ALL)01/96] 6. Before placing the child into child seat,forcibly tilt the child seat from side-to-sideand in forward directions to ensure that theseat is held securely in place. If the childseat moves excessively, repeat steps 5through 6, or properly install the child seatin a different seating position.


139

%*[SS27700(ALL)04/96] Attaching Safety Seats With Tether Straps

*[SS27750(ALL)04/96] Some manufacturers make safety seats thatinclude a tether strap that goes over the back ofthe vehicle seat and attaches to an anchoringpoint. Other manufacturers offer the tether strapas an accessory. Contact the manufacturer ofyour child safety seat for information aboutordering a tether strap.

[SS27760(ALL)04/96] You can attach a tether strap anchor bracket tothe rear floor by using a tether anchor kit(613D74), available at no charge from any Forddealership.

*[SS27770(ALL)01/96] Read and carefully follow the instructionsprovided with the kit for installation of the childtether strap anchor.

[SS27790(ALL)01/96] Ford recommends placement of tethered safetyseats in a second row seating position with thetether strap installed to the tether anchoringpoint as shown in the instructions provided withthe child tether strap anchor kit.


Only use the tether attachment holelocations shown in the illustrations. Thetether anchor may not perform properly ifthe wrong mounting location is used.

[SS27810(ALL)01/96] Four (4) tether strap anchor locations have beenprovided in your vehicle. If you want yourchild’s safety seat located in the front, right handpassenger seat, you must use the tether strapanchor attachment location under the secondrow bench seat or right hand bucket seat. Forsecond row seating positions, you must use oneof the three (3) tether strap anchor locationsunder the third row bench seat.


140

[SS27812(ALL)01/96] Until a floor anchor is installed, follow thesesteps to install a tethered child safety seat in thefront seat:

[SS27814(ALL)01/96] 1. Buckle the lap/shoulder belt in the seatdirectly behind the front passenger seat.

[SS27816(ALL)01/96] 2. Pull all the stored belt out of the rear seatbelt retractor to switch the retractor toautomatic locking mode.

*[SS27818(ALL)03/96] 3. Let the retractor wind up the slack from thelap/shoulder belt. A clicking sound shouldbe heard as the belt retracts, indicating thatthe retractor is in automatic locking mode.

[SS27820(ALL)01/96] 4. Install the child safety seat in the right frontseat. Refer to the previous section onInstalling Child Safety Seats. Hook the tetherstrap around the webbing near the center ofthe shoulder portion of the lap/shoulderbelt.

*[SS27822(ALL)05/96] 5. Tighten the tether strap.

[SS27824(ALL)01/96] Until floor-mounted tether anchors are installed,tether straps of child safety seats in the secondrow may be anchored to lap/shoulder belts forthe third row, following the five steps above, orto the tongue of the third row lap belt.


Follow these precautions to decrease thechance of injury in an accident.


If the anchor bolt(s) is ever removed, thehole(s) in the floor must be sealed toprevent the possibility of exhaust fumesentering the passenger compartment.


141

%*[SS30000(ALL)01/96] Built-In Child Seat (If equipped)

[SS30010(ALL)05/96] The second row bench seat may include anoptional built-in child safety seat. This childrestraint is to be used only by children who areat least one year old, weigh between 22 and 60pounds (10 and 27 kilograms) and whoseshoulders (top) are below the shoulder harnessslots in the seatbacks with the headrest in thefull up position.

*[SS30020(ALL)03/96] If your child is less than one year old or weighsless than 10 kilograms (22 pounds), always use arear facing infant or convertible seat because achild of that size is not sufficiently developed towithstand crash forces in a front facing position.Follow the specific manufacturer’s instructionsfor weight and height restrictions.

*[SS30030(ALL)08/95] Children must be properly buckled before ridingin the vehicle. It is the law in every state andprovince. This child seat conforms to allFederal/Canadian motor vehicle safetystandards.

*[SS30070(ALL)01/96] Always adjust the lap and shoulder harness beltsprovided with this child seat snugly aroundyour child.




Safety belts and seats can become hot in avehicle that has been closed up in sunnyweather; they could burn a small child.Check seat covers and buckles before youplace a child anywhere near them.


142


Failure to follow all of the instructions onthe use of this child restraint system canresult in your child striking the vehicle’sinterior during a sudden stop or crash.

*[SS30110(ALL)08/95] How to use the Built-In Child Seat

*[SS30120(ALL)01/96] Read the following procedures and all of thelabels on the Built-In Child Seat before using theseat.


Never use the Built-In Child Seat as abooster cushion with the adult safetybelts. A child using the adult belts couldslide forward and out from under thesafety belts.

[SS30140(ALL)01/96] 1. Pull the headrest release strap and grasp theheadrest as shown in Figure 1. Then releasethe strap and rotate the headrest fully untilthe latch “clicks” in the full up position.

[SS30155(ALL)01/96]


Figure 1

[SS30160(ALL)01/96] 2. Continue to unfold the child seat until itrests on the seat as shown in Figure 2.


143

[SS30170(ALL)01/96]


Figure 2

[SS30190(ALL)01/96] 3. Read the information and warnings on thechild seat. Check the child’s size, weight andage to be sure the child is not too small ortoo large for the child seat. Refer to Figure 3.


144

[SS30195(ALL)01/96]

two third page art:0095050-A

Figure 3

[SS30200(ALL)01/96] 4. Pull up on the two black looped straps atthe upper corners of the child seat to unsnapthe cushion protector flap.

[SS30210(ALL)01/96] 5. Lower the seat cushion.

[SS30230(ALL)01/96] 6. Pull the lap and shoulder belts cinch releasestrap while pulling the shoulder belts fullyout. Refer to Figures 4 and 5.


145

[SS30240(ALL)01/96]


Figure 4

[SS30250(ALL)01/96]


Figure 5

[SS30260(ALL)01/96] 6. If connected, squeeze the top and the bottomof the right half of the chest clip and pull toseparate both halves.

[SS30270(ALL)04/96] 7. Place the child on the child seat and positionthe shoulder belts over each shoulder. Referto Figure 6.


146

[SS30280(ALL)01/96]


Figure 6: Shoulder safety belt placement on the child

[SS30300(ALL)01/96] 8. Insert either the left or right safety belttongue into the single opening of the crotchbelt buckle as shown in Figure 7. (It doesnot matter which tongue is inserted first.)Then insert the other tongue.


If both tongues do not latch in the buckle,do not use the child seat. See your dealerfor repairs.

[SS30320(ALL)01/96]


Figure 7: Fastening the crotch safety belt buckle


147

[SS30330(ALL)01/96] 9. Fasten both halves of the chest clip belowthe child’s shoulders and adjust it tocomfortably hold the shoulder belts in placeon the child’s chest. The purpose of this clipis to position the shoulder belts correctly onthe child’s shoulders. The clip can be easilypulled apart, and is designed to pull apartduring a collision. The clip helps keep theshoulder belts on the shoulders of a sleepingor squirming child. Refer to Figure 8.

[SS30340(ALL)01/96]


Figure 8: Securing the chest clip

[SS30350(ALL)01/96] 10. Pull the shoulder belts out to ensure that thecrotch safety belt buckle is securely fastened.Adjust the lap and shoulder belts by pullingfirmly on the adjustment belt. Refer toFigure 9.


148

[SS30360(ALL)01/96]


Figure 9: Checking for securely latched buckle and lockedretractor

[SS30370(ALL)01/96] 11. If the shoulder belts are pulled too tight,pull on the lap and shoulder belts cinchrelease strap to loosen the shoulder belts onthe child’s shoulders. Refer to Figure 4. Thenretighten the lap and shoulder adjustmentbelt per Step 10 above.

*[SS30380(ALL)08/95] To remove the child from the built-in childseat:

[SS30390(ALL)01/96] 1. Squeeze the tabs on the top and bottom ofthe chest clip and pull the halves apart toopen the chest clip. Refer to Figure 8.

*[SS30400(ALL)08/95] 2. Press the release button on the crotch safetybelt buckle.

[SS30410(ALL)01/96] 3. Slide the shoulder belts off the child’sshoulders and remove the child. Refer toFigure 6.


149

[SS30420(ALL)04/96] To stow the built-in child seat:

[SS30430(ALL)01/96] 1. Return the child seat cushion to the uprightposition and lift the protector flap towardthe headrest.

[SS30440(ALL)01/96] 2. Fasten the snaps securely.

[SS30450(ALL)01/96] 3. Pull on the headrest release strap and rotatethe headrest downward until it latchesagainst the child seat cushion.


Always fasten the protector flap snapswhen stowing your child seats to preventthe child seat cushion from rotatingforward in a collision.

[SS30470(ALL)01/96] The seat can now be used by an adult.

*[SS30480(ALL)01/96] Inspection after a collision


All built-in child restraints, includingseats, buckles, retractors, seat latches,interlocks, and attaching hardware shouldbe inspected by a qualified dealertechnician after any collision.

*[SS30495(ALL)01/96] If the child seat was in use during a collision,Ford recommends replacing it. However, if thecollision was minor and a qualified technicianfinds that the child restraints do not showdamage and continue to operate properly, theydo not need to be replaced. If there is anybending of the vehicle seatback or seat structure,it should also be replaced. Built-in child seatsnot in use during a collision should also beinspected and replaced if either damage orimproper operation is noted.


150

*[SS30500(ALL)08/95] Built-in child seat maintenance

[SS30510(ALL)04/96] Regularly inspect the lap and shoulder beltssystem of your child seat. See your Ford dealerif the shoulder belt webbing is frayed, or if thebuckle and tongue are damaged and/or do notfunction properly.

%*[SS30540(ALL)01/96] Safety Belts for Children

*[SS30550(ALL)01/96] Children who are too large for child safety seatsshould always wear safety belts. (See instructionswith your child seat, or contact its manufacturer,to determine maximum size of child that willsafely fit in the seat.)


If safety belts are not properly worn andadjusted as described, the risk of seriousinjury to the child in a collision will bemuch greater.

*[SS30570(ALL)01/96] If the shoulder belt portion of one of the lap andshoulder belts can be positioned so that it doesnot cross or rest in front of the child’s face orneck, the child should wear the lap and shoulderbelt. Moving the child closer to the center of thevehicle may help provide a good shoulder beltfit.


151

*[SS30580(ALL)01/96] To improve the fit of lap and shoulder belts onchildren who have outgrown child safety seats,Ford recommends use of a belt-positioningbooster seat that is labelled as conforming to allFederal motor vehicle safety standards.Belt-positioning booster seats raise the child andprovide a shorter, firmer seating cushion thatencourages safer seating posture and better fit oflap and shoulder belts on the child. Abelt-positioning booster should be used if theshoulder belt rests in front of the child’s face orneck, or if the lap belt does not fit snugly onboth thighs, or if the thighs are too short to letthe child sit all the way back on the seat cushionwhen the lower legs hang over the edge of theseat cushion. You may wish to discuss thespecific needs of your child with yourpediatrician.


Do not use a belt-positioning booster witha lap-only belt.

*[SS30600(ALL)01/96] Lap belts and the lap belt portion of lap andshoulder belts should always be worn snuglyand below the hips, touching the child’s thighs.




153

Starting

%*[TO04800(ALL)01/96] Fuel-Injected Engines*[TO04900(ALL)01/96] When starting a fuel-injected engine, the most

important thing to remember is to avoidpressing down on the accelerator before orduring starting. Only use the accelerator whenyou have problems getting your vehicle started.See Starting Your Engine in this chapter fordetails about when to use the accelerator whileyou start your vehicle.

*[TO05150(ALL)01/96] Starting Your Vehicle%*[TO05200(ALL)01/96] Preparing to Start Your Vehicle

*[TO05300(ALL)02/96]RWARNING

Do not start your vehicle in a closedgarage or in other enclosed areas. Exhaustfumes can be toxic. Always open thegarage door before you start the engine.

*[TO05400(ALL)01/96] Before you start your vehicle, do the following:

*[TO05500(ALL)01/96] 1. Make sure all occupants in the vehiclebuckle their safety belts. See Safety Restraintsin the Index for more details.

*[TO05600(ALL)01/96] 2. Make sure the headlamps and otheraccessories are turned off when starting.

*[TO05750(ALL)01/96] 3. Make sure that the gearshift is in P (Park)and the parking brake is set before you turnthe key.

*[TO06015(ALL)02/96] Before you start your vehicle, you should testthe warning lights on the instrument panel tomake sure that they work. Refer to theInstrumentation chapter.

File:08cptoa.exUpdate:Thu Jun 6 14:43:40 1996

154

%*[TO06200(ALL)01/96] Starting Your Engine

*[TO06300(ALL)01/96] To start your engine:

*[TO06400(ALL)01/96] 1. Follow the steps under Preparing to StartYour Vehicle at the beginning of this section.

*[TO06425(ALL)01/96] 2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.

*[TO06451(ALL)01/96] 3. DO NOT depress the accelerator pedal whenstarting your engine. DO NOT use theaccelerator while the vehicle is parked.

*[TO06475(ALL)01/96] 4. Turn the key to the START position(cranking) until the engine starts. Allow thekey to return to the ON position after theengine has started.

*[TO06501(ALL)05/96] If you have difficulty in turning the key,rotate the steering wheel slightly because itmay be binding.

%*[TO06505(ALL)01/96] For a cold engine:

*[TO06510(ALL)01/96] ❑At temperatures 10˚F (-12˚C) and below: Ifthe engine does not start in fifteen (15)seconds on the first try, turn the key to OFF,wait approximately ten (10) seconds so youdo not flood the engine, then try again.

*[TO06515(ALL)01/96] ❑At temperatures above 10˚F (-12˚C): If theengine does not start in five (5) seconds onthe first try, turn the key to OFF, waitapproximately ten (10) seconds so you do notflood the engine, then try again.

%*[TO06530(ALL)01/96] For a warm engine:

*[TO06551(ALL)01/96] ❑Do not hold the key in the START positionfor more than five (5) seconds at a time. Ifthe engine does not start within five (5)seconds on the first try, turn the key to theOFF position. Wait a few seconds after thestarter stops, then try again.


155

*[TO06575(ALL)01/96] Whenever you start your vehicle, release the keyas soon as the engine starts. Excessive crankingcould damage the starter.

*[TO06601(ALL)01/96] After starting, allow the engine to idle for a fewseconds before driving away.

%*[TO06625(ALL)05/96] NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with abrake-shift interlock feature. Thisfeature prevents you from shiftingfrom P (Park) unless you have thebrake pedal depressed. (The ignitionmust be in the ON position.) If youcannot shift from P (Park) with thebrake pedal depressed:

*[TO06627(ALL)05/96] 1. Apply the parking brake.

*[TO06629(ALL)05/96] 2. Remove the key.

*[TO06631(ALL)05/96] 3. Insert the key and rotate it one positionclockwise (ignition in the OFF position).

*[TO06633(ALL)05/96] 4. Apply the brake pedal and shift to N(Neutral). (If the vehicle is shifted back to P[Park], you must repeat the previous steps.)

*[TO06635(ALL)05/96] 5. Start the vehicle.

*[TO06637(ALL)05/96] If you need to shift out of P (Park) by using thealternate procedure described above, it ispossible that a fuse has blown and that yourbrakelamps may also not be functional. Pleaserefer to the chapter titled Roadside Emergencies inthis Owner Guide for instructions on checkingand replacing fuses.


DO NOT DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE UNTILYOU VERIFY THAT THE BRAKELAMPSARE WORKING.


156

*[TO06800(ALL)01/96] If the engine still does not start after twoattempts:

*[TO06825(ALL)01/96] 1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.

*[TO06851(ALL)01/96] 2. Press the accelerator all the way to the floorand hold it.

*[TO06876(ALL)01/96] 3. Turn the ignition key to the START position.

*[TO06900(ALL)01/96] 4. Release the ignition key when the enginestarts.

*[TO06925(ALL)03/96] 5. Release the accelerator gradually as theengine speeds up.

*[TO06951(ALL)05/96] If the engine still does not start, the fuel pumpshut-off switch may have been activated. Fordirections on how to reset the switch see FuelPump Shut-Off Switch in the index.

%*[TO07300(ALL)01/96] A computer system controls the engine’s idlespeed. When you start your vehicle, the engine’sidle speed normally runs high. These fasterengine speeds will make your vehicle coastslightly faster than its normal idle speed. Itshould, however, slow down after a short time.If it does not, have the idle speed checked.

*[TO07390(ALL)01/96] If the engine idle speed does not slow downautomatically, do not allow your vehicle to idlefor more than 10 minutes. Have the vehiclechecked.


Extended idling at high engine speeds canproduce very high temperatures in theengine and exhaust system, creating therisk of fire or other damage.


157


Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle indry grass or other dry ground cover. Theemission system heats up the enginecompartment and exhaust system, whichcan start a fire.

*[TO07500(ALL)01/96] If you consistently start your vehicle in subzerotemperatures, use an engine block heater (ifyour vehicle has this option).

%*[TO07600(ALL)01/96] Engine Block Heater (If equipped)

*[TO07700(ALL)01/96] Engine block heaters are strongly recommendedif you live in a region where temperatures reach-10˚F (-23˚C) or below. An engine block heaterwarms the engine coolant, which improvesstarting, warms up the engine faster, and allowsthe heater-defrost system to respond quickly.


To prevent electrical shock, do not useyour heater with ungrounded electricalsystems or two-pronged (cheater) adapters.

*[TO08100(ALL)01/96] For best results, plug the heater in at least threehours before you start your vehicle. Using theheater for longer than three hours will notdamage the engine, so you can plug it in atnight to start your vehicle the followingmorning.

*[TO08150(ALL)01/96] NOTE: Be sure to disconnect the engine blockheater before driving your vehicle.


158

%*[TO08500(ALL)01/96] If the Engine Cranks but DoesNot Start or Does Not Start Aftera Collision

%*[TO08510(ALL)01/96] Fuel Pump Shut-Off Switch

[TO08520(ALL)03/96] If the engine cranks but does not start or doesnot start even after a small collision, the fuelpump shut-off switch may have been activated.The shut-off switch is a device intended to stopthe fuel pump when your vehicle has beeninvolved in a substantial jolt. Refer to theRoadside Emergencies chapter.

*[TO08530(ALL)03/96] Once the shut-off switch is activated, you mustreset the switch by hand before you can startyour vehicle.

[TO08540(ALL)01/96]


Fuel pump shut-off switch location


If you see or smell fuel, do not reset theswitch or try to start your vehicle. Haveall the passengers get out of the vehicleand call the local fire department or atowing service.


159

*[TO08560(ALL)03/96] If your engine cranks but does not start after acollision or substantial jolt:

*[TO08570(ALL)01/96] 1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.

*[TO08580(ALL)03/96] 2. Check under the vehicle for leaking fuel.

*[TO08590(ALL)01/96] 3. If you do not see or smell fuel, push the redreset button down. If the button is alreadyset, you may have a different mechanicalproblem.

*[TO08600(ALL)01/96] 4. Turn the ignition key to the ON position fora few seconds, then turn it to the OFFposition.

*[TO08610(ALL)03/96] 5. Check under the vehicle again for leakingfuel. If you see or smell fuel, do not startyour vehicle again. If you do not see orsmell fuel, you can try to start your vehicleagain.

*[TO08620(ALL)01/96] 6. Check all vehicle warning lights beforedriving the vehicle.

[TO08630(ALL)04/96]


Reset button for fuel pump shut-off switch


Do not start your vehicle in a closedgarage or in other enclosed areas. Exhaustfumes can be toxic. Always open thegarage door before you start the engine.


160

*[TO09300(ALL)12/95] Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes

*[TO09400(ALL)01/96] Carbon monoxide, although colorless andodorless, is present in exhaust fumes. Takeprecautions to avoid its dangerous effects.


If you smell exhaust fumes inside yourvehicle, have your dealer inspect yourvehicle immediately. Do not drive if yousmell exhaust fumes.

[TO09700(ALL)04/96] If your vehicle has rear windows and doors thatwere installed as part of a van conversion, closethem while it is running. This prevents exhaustfumes from being drawn into the passengercompartment.

*[TO09900(ALL)01/96] Have the exhaust and body ventilation systemschecked whenever:

*[TO10000(ALL)01/96] ❑your vehicle is raised for service

*[TO10100(ALL)01/96] ❑ the sound of the exhaust system changes

*[TO10200(ALL)01/96] ❑your vehicle has been damaged in a collision

*[TO10300(ALL)01/96] Improve your ventilation by keeping all air inletvents clear of snow, leaves, and other debris.

*[TO10400(ALL)01/96] If the engine is idling while you are stopped inan open area for long periods of time, open thewindows at least one inch (2.5 cm). Also, adjustthe heating or air conditioning system to bringin outside air.

*[TO10600(ALL)01/96] ❑HEATING — Set fan speed at MEDIUM orHIGH, the function selector knob on VENT,FLOOR, MIX, or the DEFROST symbol andthe temperature control knob on any desiredposition.


161

[TO10800(ALL)01/96] ❑AIR CONDITIONING — Set the fan speedknob at MEDIUM or HIGH, the functionselector knob on NORM A/C or MAX A/Cand the temperature control knob on anydesired position.

*[TO12000(ALL)03/96] Removing the Key From theIgnition

*[TO12100(ALL)03/96] 1. Put the gearshift in P (Park).

*[TO12200(ALL)03/96] 2. Set the parking brake fully before removingyour foot from the service brake. (This willavoid “binding” or “loading” the park gearif you park on a grade.)

*[TO12300(ALL)03/96] 3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.

*[TO12400(ALL)03/96] 4. Remove the key.


Always set the parking brake fully andmake sure the gearshift is latched in P(Park). Turn off the ignition whenever youleave your vehicle.




163

Driving

%*[GF00300(ALL)05/96] Brakes

*[GF00350(ALL)01/96] Front Disc Brakes

*[GF00400(ALL)01/96] The front disc brakes are self-adjusting. They donot require service other than periodic inspectionfor pad wear.

*[GF00450(ALL)03/96] Rear Drum Brakes

*[GF00500(ALL)03/96] The rear drum brakes are self-adjusting.Automatic adjustment occurs when the brakesare applied while “backing up.” If normaloperation does not include much backing, adjustthe brakes when they seem “low,” using theprocedure under If Brakes Do Not Grip Well orPedal is “Low” in this chapter.

*[GF00550(ALL)01/96] Hydraulic Power Brakes

*[GF00600(ALL)03/96] The hydraulic brake system is made up of twoindependent hydraulic circuits. One hydrauliccircuit supplies fluid to the front disc brakes andthe other hydraulic circuit supplies fluid to therear drum brakes. These two circuits aresupplied by a common hydraulic brake fluidreservoir, with a fluid level sensor.

*[GF00650(ALL)01/96] The brake light in the instrument cluster willlight for low brake fluid in the common brakefluid reservoir.

*[GF00700(ALL)01/96]RWARNING

An increase in pedal travel will result inreduced braking capability. The brakesystem should be checked immediately.

File:09cpgfa.exUpdate:Wed Jun 5 12:04:06 1996

164

%*[GF00750(ALL)01/96] Rear Anti-lock Brakes

[GF00800(ALL)01/96] Your vehicle is equipped with a rear Anti-lockBrake System (ABS). This system prevents atleast one and often both rear wheels fromcompletely locking up when the brakes areapplied in a panic stop, for example.

*[GF00850(ALL)01/96] Even with the Anti-lock Brake System, youshould be careful when braking. Front brakelock up on any surface, even on smoothpavement causes loss of steering control. Heavybraking on roads with loose surfaces such assnow or gravel, or severe pavement irregularitiescould also cause you to lose steering control ofyour vehicle.


If the anti-lock brake system warninglight remains on or comes on whiledriving, have the braking system checkedby a qualified service technician as soonas possible.

*[GF00950(ALL)03/96] NOTE: If a fault occurs in the anti-locksystem, and the brake warning light isnot lit, the anti-lock system is disabledbut normal brake function remainsoperational.

%*[GF01000(ALL)03/96] If Brakes Do Not Grip Well or Pedal is“Low”

%*[GF01100(ALL)03/96] If brakes do not grip well, it may indicate therear drum brakes need adjustment. To do this,drive the vehicle in reverse at 5 mph (8 km/h)on level, dry pavement. Stop the vehicle byfirmly applying the brakes. Repeat thisprocedure four or five times.


165

*[GF01150(ALL)01/96] If during normal operation the brake pedalseems “low”, it may indicate the need for abrake system inspection and/or service. Youshould have your brakes checked as soon aspossible.

%*[GF01200(ALL)01/96] Occasional brake squeal during light to moderatestops does not affect the function of the brakesystem and is normal. However, if the squealbecomes louder or more frequent, have yourbrakes inspected by your dealer or a qualifiedservice technician.


Modifications to the suspension springrates and/or vehicle ride height mayadversely affect vehicle stopping ability.

*[GF01300(ALL)03/96] If Brakes Pull

*[GF01350(ALL)03/96] ❑Check tire pressure.

*[GF01400(ALL)03/96] ❑Perform the self-adjustment proceduredescribed under If Brakes Do Not Grip Well orPedal is “Low.”

*[GF01450(ALL)03/96] If pull occurs during the first 500 miles(800 km), make 10 moderately fast stops from40 mph (65 km/h) and then perform theself-adjustment procedure above. It may benecessary to repeat this operation to properlyseat new brake linings and pads.

%*[GF01500(ALL)01/96] Stopping Distances

*[GF01550(ALL)01/96] Stopping distances vary with different loads anddriving conditions. Use caution whenencountering new conditions and acquaintyourself with vehicle performance. Take fulladvantage of engine braking power whenslowing down.


166

%*[GF01600(ALL)01/96] Applying the Brakes

*[GF01650(ALL)01/96] Apply the brake pedal gradually. Use the“squeeze” technique — push on the brake pedalwith a steadily increasing force. This allows thewheels to continue to roll while you are slowingdown, which lets you steer properly.

*[GF01700(ALL)02/96] NOTE: If you are driving down a long orsteep hill, shift to a lower gear and donot apply your brakes continuously. Ifyou apply your brakes continuously,they may overheat and become lesseffective.

%*[GF01750(ALL)05/96] Parking Brake

*[GF01800(ALL)03/96] The parking brake should be used wheneveryou park your vehicle.

[GF01850(ALL)01/96] The parking brake is a hand operated leverlocated on the floor of your van just to the rightof the driver’s seat.

[GF01900(ALL)01/96] To set the parking brake while parking yourvan, press the brake pedal with your right footand hold it while you fully apply the parkingbrake lever.

[GF01950(ALL)01/96] To release the parking brake, press the brakepedal with your right foot, depress the releasebutton in the parking brake lever while pullingup on the lever, and then lower the lever all theway to the floor.


167

[GF02000(ALL)01/96]


Parking Brake




If the parking brake is fully released, butthe Brake System light remains on, havethe brakes checked immediately. Theymay not be working properly.

*[GF02250(ALL)03/96] The parking brake is not designed to stop amoving vehicle, but you can use the parkingbrake to stop your vehicle in an emergency ifthe normal brakes fail. However, since theparking brake applies only the rear brakes, thestopping distance will increase greatly and thehandling of your vehicle will be adverselyaffected.


168

%*[GF04000(ALL)01/96] Steering Your Vehicle%*[GF04100(ALL)01/96] Your vehicle comes with power steering. Power

steering uses energy from the engine to helpsteer your vehicle.

%*[GF04150(ALL)03/96] If the amount of effort needed to steer yourvehicle changes at a constant vehicle speed, havethe power steering system checked. If the powersteering system breaks down (or if the engine isturned off), you can steer the vehicle manuallybut it takes more effort.

*[GF04200(ALL)01/96] Never hold the steering wheel to the extremeright or left for more than five seconds if theengine is running. This can damage the powersteering pump.

*[GF04300(ALL)01/96] NOTE: After any severe impact such asstriking large potholes, sliding intocurbs on icy roads, or a collisioninvolving the front end, observe thesteering wheel alignment. If the spokesof the steering wheel seem to be in adifferent position while going straightdown the road, have the frontsuspension and steering checked forpossible damage.

[GF10000(ALL)03/96] Automatic TransmissionOperation (4R44E/5R55E)

[GF10050(ALL)06/96] If your vehicle is equipped with an automatictransmission, it will be either a four speedoverdrive transmission (4R44E) or a five speedoverdrive transmission (5R55E). All 3.0L enginesuse the 4R44E transmission, while all 4.0Lengines use the 5R55E transmission. Bothtransmission types have a lockup torqueconverter. Transmission operation is controlledby the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).


169

*[GF10150(ALL)01/96] The PCM will automatically adjust transmissionoperation to make up for varying conditions.Several sensors located on the engine andtransmission such as throttle position, enginespeed, vehicle speed and transmissiontemperature are used by the PCM to shift thetransmission into a higher or lower gear whenrequired for the best performance and fueleconomy. For example, you may notice that thetransmission will upshift to a higher gear morequickly when the vehicle has not reached normaloperating temperature.

*[GF10200(ALL)01/96] The PCM also controls the transmission’s TorqueConverter Clutch (TCC) to further raise vehicleperformance and fuel economy. The TCC willengage when the transmission operatingtemperature and other conditions determined bythe PCM have been met. Engagement of theclutch may be noted as a decrease in enginespeed.

[GF10250(ALL)05/96] To help in troubleshooting, the PCM continuallyperforms self-tests on the electronic controlsystem and, if any faults are detected, storesthem in memory. The Transmission ControlIndicator Light (TCIL) (O/D OFF), which islocated on the gearshift lever, may flash steadilyif a malfunction has been detected. If the TCIL isflashing, contact your Ford dealer as soon aspossible. If this condition persists, damage to thetransmission could occur.

*[GF10320(ALL)05/96] Speed limiter

*[GF10330(ALL)06/96] All models are equipped with a PowertrainControl Module (PCM) which limits themaximum engine speed and thus road speed intop gear. Vehicle operation is normal since thecontrolled maximum speed is above postedhighway speeds in North America.


170

*[GF10400(ALL)05/96] Power Braking

*[GF10410(ALL)05/96] Increasing the engine speed above idle withoutvehicle movement (such as holding the brake) ina forward or reverse gear causes transmissionstall.

*[GF10450(ALL)05/96] NOTE: Continued operation in the stallcondition can result in transmissionoverheat, malfunction or fluidexpulsion.

*[GF10500(ALL)05/96] Automatic OverdriveTransmission

%*[GF10750(ALL)05/96] Putting Your Vehicle in Gear

[GF10800(ALL)05/96] Your vehicle’s gearshift is on the steeringcolumn. The transmission control switch islocated on the end of the gearshift lever. Youcan put the gearshift in any one of severalpositions.

[GF10900(ALL)01/96]


The positions of the column-mounted gearshift


171

[GF10920(ALL)06/96]



Hold the brake pedal down while youmove the gearshift lever from position toposition. If you do not hold the brakepedal down, your vehicle may moveunexpectedly and injure someone.

*[GF12000(ALL)05/96] Once you place the gearshift securely intoposition, gradually release the brake pedal anduse the accelerator as necessary.

%*[GF12100(ALL)05/96] NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with abrake-shift interlock feature. Thisfeature prevents you from shiftingfrom P (Park) unless you have thebrake pedal depressed. (The ignitionmust be in the ON position.) If youcannot shift from P (Park) with thebrake pedal depressed:

*[GF12200(ALL)05/96] 1. Apply the parking brake.

*[GF12300(ALL)05/96] 2. Remove the key.

*[GF12400(ALL)05/96] 3. Insert the key and rotate it one positionclockwise (ignition in the OFF position).


172

*[GF12500(ALL)05/96] 4. Apply the brake pedal and shift to N(Neutral). (If the vehicle is shifted back to P[Park], you must repeat the previous steps.)

*[GF12600(ALL)05/96] 5. Start the vehicle.

*[GF12700(ALL)05/96] If you need to shift out of P (Park) by using thealternate procedure described above, it ispossible that a fuse has blown and that yourbrakelamps may also not be functional. Pleaserefer to the chapter titled Roadside Emergencies inthis Owner Guide for instructions on checkingand replacing fuses.


DO NOT DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE UNTILYOU VERIFY THAT THE BRAKELAMPSARE WORKING.

*[GF12820(ALL)05/96] P (Park)

[GF12830(ALL)03/96] Always come to a complete stop before you shiftinto P (Park). This position locks thetransmission and prevents the rear wheels fromturning.

[GF12840(ALL)03/96] To securely latch the gearshift in the P (Park)position, pull it toward you, push it completelycounterclockwise against the stop, and then pushit toward the instrument panel.

*[GF12850(ALL)06/96] The gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) ifyou cannot rotate it in a clockwise directionwithout lifting it toward you.




173


Never leave your vehicle unattendedwhile it is running.

%*[GF12900(ALL)05/96] R (Reverse)

*[GF12950(ALL)05/96] With the gearshift in the R (Reverse) position,the vehicle will move backward. You shouldalways come to a complete stop before shiftinginto or out of R (Reverse).

*[GF12975(ALL)01/96] N (Neutral)

*[GF12990(ALL)06/96] With the gearshift in the N (Neutral) position,the vehicle can be started and is free to roll.Hold the brake pedal down while in thisposition.


Do not leave the vehicle unattended withthe transfer case in the N (Neutral)position. Always set the parking brakefully and turn off the ignition whenleaving the vehicle.

*[GF13000(ALL)06/96] With the transfer case in N (Neutral), the vehicleis free to move with either the automatictransmission in P (Park) or with the manualtransmission in any driving gear.

[GF13050(ALL)03/96] Driving (4R44E Transmission)

%*[GF13100(ALL)05/96] When to use j (Overdrive)

*[GF13150(ALL)05/96] This is the normal driving position. As thevehicle picks up speed, automatic upshifts tosecond, third and fourth gears will occur whenj Overdrive is chosen on the selector and thetransmission control switch has not beenpressed. The transmission will shift into thecorrect gear when the right speed is achieved,for the accelerator pedal position you havechosen.


174

*[GF13200(ALL)05/96] When to use Drive

[GF13250(ALL)01/96] You will note there is not a drive position onyour gearshift indicator. However, you will finda transmission control switch labeledOVERDRIVE OFF located on the end of thegearshift lever. Press this switch and theindicator light (OFF) illuminates on the gearshiftlever. With overdrive cancelled and theOVERDRIVE OFF illuminated, the transmissionwill operate in gears one through three. This isuseful if you experience frequentdownshift/upshift conditions, when operatingwith a heavy load or in hilly terrain, or ifadditional engine braking is useful. However,shift back to j (Overdrive) whenever practicalfor optimum powertrain cooling and fueleconomy. This can be accomplished by pushingthe transmission control switch again, to cancelthe OVERDRIVE OFF control and light.

[GF13300(ALL)06/96]


[GF13320(ALL)05/96] When starting your vehicle, the overdrive systemwill automatically be in the normal overdrivemode.


175

*[GF13400(ALL)05/96] When to use 2 (Second)

*[GF13450(ALL)05/96] Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads orto provide additional engine braking ondowngrades. This position provides 2 (Second)gear operation only.

*[GF13475(ALL)05/96] When to use 1 (Low)

*[GF14000(ALL)05/96] Use 1 (Low) to provide maximum enginebraking on steep downgrades. Upshifts from 1(Low) can be made by manually shifting to 2(Second) or j (Overdrive). Selection of 1 (Low)gear provides only low gear operation fromstart-up. Selection of 1 (Low) while at higherspeeds provides a shift to second gear, and ashift to first gear will occur after the vehicledecelerates to the proper speed.

*[GF14500(ALL)05/96] Forced Downshifts

[GF14550(ALL)03/96] To gain acceleration in j (Overdrive) or Drive(j position with Overdrive cancelled) whenpassing another vehicle, push the accelerator tothe floor. The transmission will downshift to theappropriate gear: third, second or first.

[GF14600(ALL)03/96] Driving (5R55E Transmission)

[GF14650(ALL)05/96] When to use j (Overdrive)

*[GF14700(ALL)05/96] This is the normal driving position. As thevehicle picks up speed, automatic upshifts tosecond, third, fourth and fifth gears will occurwhen j (Overdrive) is chosen on the selectorand the transmission control switch has not beenpressed. The transmission will shift into thecorrect gear when the right speed is achieved,for the accelerator pedal position you havechosen.


176

*[GF14750(ALL)05/96] When to use Drive

[GF14800(ALL)03/96] You will note there is not a drive position onyour gearshift indicator. However, you will finda transmission control switch labeledOVERDRIVE OFF located on the end of thegearshift lever. With overdrive canceled and theOVERDRIVE OFF illuminated, the transmissionwill operate in gears one through four. This isuseful if you experience frequentdownshift/upshift conditions, when operating aheavy load or in hilly terrain, or if additionalengine braking is useful. However, shift back toj (Overdrive) whenever practical for optimumpowertrain cooling and fuel economy. This canbe accomplished by pushing the transmissioncontrol switch again, to cancel the OVERDRIVEOFF control and light.

*[GF14850(ALL)05/96] When to use 2 (Second)

*[GF14900(ALL)05/96] With the gearshift in the 2 (Second) position,more engine braking is provided. Use the 2(Second) position to drive up moderately steepgrades, to start up slippery roads, or to providemoderate engine braking on downgrades. DONOT GO FASTER THAN 55 mph (88 km/h) INTHIS GEARSHIFT POSITION.

*[GF14950(ALL)05/96] When to use 1 (Low)

*[GF14970(ALL)05/96] With the gearshift in the 1 (First) position,maximum engine braking is provided. Thisposition provides 1 (First) gear operation onlywith no automatic upshifts. To obtain upshifts,the gearshift must be moved out of this position.Use the 1 (First) position to drive up steepgrades or to provide maximum engine brakingon downgrades.


177

*[GF15000(ALL)05/96] Forced Downshifts

[GF15100(ALL)06/96] To gain acceleration in j (Overdrive) or Drive(Overdrive off) when passing another vehicle,push the accelerator to the floor. Thetransmission will downshift to the appropriategear: fourth, third, second or first gear.

%*[GF15600(ALL)05/96] Traction-Lok Rear Axle(If equipped)

*[GF15700(ALL)05/96] This axle provides added drive away traction onslippery surfaces, particularly when one or morewheels are on a surface with poor traction.

*[GF15800(ALL)03/96] Extended use of other than matching size tireson a Traction-Lok rear axle could result in apermanent reduction in effectiveness. This loss ofeffectiveness does not affect normal driving andshould not be noticeable to the driver.

[GF16005(ALL)01/96] Electronic 4-Wheel Drive (E-4WD)(If equipped)

[GF16015(ALL)01/96] If your vehicle is equipped with the E-4WDoption, power is provided to all four wheelswhenever you press the accelerator pedal. Itimproves both handling and traction duringdifficult driving conditions, adjustingautomatically to your driving needs. Because theentire E-4WD system is controlled by amicroprocessor, your vehicle is not equippedwith the switch or shift lever used with mosttraditional 4WD vehicles. The microprocessordoes all the adjusting for you.


178

[GF16025(ALL)01/96] How the Electronic 4-Wheel Drive (E-4WD)System Works

[GF16036(ALL)01/96] Under normal driving conditions, when the roadis firm, dry and level, the engine power isdistributed one-third to the front axle andtwo-thirds to the rear axle. However, if a wheelbegins to slip, the microprocessor will sense thiscondition and signal the system to transmit morepower to the axle with more traction. (You mayfeel a momentary surge of power.)

[GF16046(ALL)01/96] NOTE: The microprocessor is disabled whenthe brakes are applied or when thetransmission selector is in the P (Park)or N (Neutral) positions.

[GF16055(ALL)01/96] Driving Your Electronic 4-Wheel Drive(E-4WD) Vehicle

[GF16065(ALL)01/96] Since your E-4WD vehicle is unique, follow thesesteps to be safe:

[GF16075(ALL)01/96] ❑Avoid unnecessary turns or other maneuversthat could cause loss of control and possibleinjury.

[GF16076(ALL)01/96] ❑Use the same size and type of tire and wheelas originally provided for your vehicle andinflate the tires to the manufacturer’srecommended air pressure.

[GF16077(ALL)01/96] ❑Become familiar with your vehicle’s operatingcharacteristics and study this Owner Guidefor specific operating instructions. Be sure alloccupants wear the safety belts provided.Drive cautiously, defensively, and at speedssafe for current road conditions.


179

[GF16095(ALL)01/96] ❑Do not let the added driving traction ofE-4WD lead you to believe that you can stopany quicker than a conventional two-wheeldrive vehicle. The added traction performancedoes not improve the braking ability of theE-4WD vehicle. Allow the same amount ofdistance when braking as with a two-wheeldrive vehicle.

[GF16096(ALL)01/96]RWARNING

Your E-4WD Aerostar is a passengervehicle designed for on-road use; it is notintended for any off-road use.

[GF16097(ALL)01/96]RWARNING

On-vehicle wheel balancing will causedamage to the drivetrain of E-4WDAerostars.

%*[GF28050(ALL)01/96] Driving With a Heavy Load

*[GF28101(ALL)01/96] There are limits to the amount of weight yourvehicle can carry or tow. The total weight ofyour vehicle, plus the weight of the passengersand cargo, should never be more than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). Also, the weightthat your vehicle carries over the front axle andrear axle should never be more than the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the respectiveaxle.

*[GF28150(ALL)01/96] The weight limits of your vehicle’s tires affectthe GVWR or GAWR limitations. Usage ofreplacement tires with higher weight limits thanoriginals does not increase GVWR or GAWR.Usage of lower capacity replacement tires maylower GVWR and GAWR limitations.


180


Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWRspecified on the Safety ComplianceCertification Label.

*[GF28750(ALL)03/96] Vehicle/Trailer Loads

*[GF28801(ALL)03/96] All vehicles may tow a Class I trailer providedthe Gross Combined Weight (GCW) is less thanor equal to the GVWR shown on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label. For heaviertrailer applications, refer to the towinginformation found later in this chapter.

*[GF29001(ALL)01/96] Towing a trailer puts additional loads on yourvehicle’s engine, transmission, axle, brakes, tiresand suspension. For your safety and for thegood of your vehicle, use the right equipmentfor the type of trailer you tow.

*[GF29025(ALL)01/96] Your trailer towing capability will vary based onthe standard and optional equipment on yourvehicle. Refer to the following VehicleLoading/Towing Information and the TrailerTowing Tables to determine the specific towingcapability of your vehicle.

*[GF29050(ALL)01/96] ❑Stay within the load limits when you tow.

*[GF29101(ALL)05/96] ❑Carefully and thoroughly prepare yourvehicle for towing, making sure to use theright equipment and to attach it properly.(See Preparing to Tow in this chapter.)

*[GF29151(ALL)05/96] ❑Use extra caution when driving your vehiclewhile you tow. (See Driving while you tow inthis chapter.)

*[GF29201(ALL)05/96] ❑Service your vehicle more frequently if youtow a trailer. (See Servicing your vehicle if youtow in this chapter.)


181

[GF29250(ALL)01/96] Standard length vehicles adapted for trailer towmay require relocation of the underbody sparetire. It is recommended that you secure the tireunder the rear-most seat using the hold-downhardware located with the jack.

[GF29301(ALL)01/96]


Spare tire stowage (standard length model)

*[GF29350(ALL)01/96] Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has beendriven at least 500 miles (800 km).

%*[GF29401(ALL)01/96] Vehicle Loading/TowingInformation

*[GF29450(ALL)01/96] Your vehicle’s load capacity is designated byweight, not volume, so you cannot necessarilyuse all available space with large or heavy loads.Maximum safe vehicle weights as well as tire,rim sizes and inflation pressures are specified foryour vehicle at the assembly plant on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label. The CertificationLabel is located on the left front door lock facingor the door latch post pillar.


182

*[GF29501(ALL)01/96] Trucks, unlike passenger cars, are basicallycustom vehicles designed to carry a load. Mostowners start with a base vehicle and addproduction and dealer installed and/oraftermarket components to suit their tastes andpurposes. Even trucks that are purchased forpersonal transportation only are likely to haveconsiderable optional equipment, such as stepbumpers and light bars, for example.


It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.


Cargo should always be secured toprevent it from shifting and causingdamage to the vehicle or harm topassengers.

*[GF29551(ALL)01/96] Each additional item of equipment affects howmuch cargo a vehicle can carry. If a vehicle isoverloaded, performance will suffer and serviceconcerns may arise.


183

*[GF29601(ALL)01/96] The following is a typical example of a SafetyCompliance Certification Label and anexplanation of how this information should beused:

[GF29650(ALL)01/96]

half page art:0020148-G

Safety Compliance Certification Label

*[GF29950(ALL)01/96] Do not use the sample numbers on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label shown. Use theactual numbers from your vehicle certificationlabel.

*[GF30001(ALL)01/96] Understanding Loading/TowingInformation

*[GF30050(ALL)01/96] The following terms are used to describe theability to carry or tow a load:

*[GF30101(ALL)01/96] ❑Base Curb Weight

*[GF30150(ALL)01/96] ❑Payload

*[GF30200(ALL)01/96] ❑GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)

*[GF30250(ALL)01/96] ❑GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)


184

*[GF30301(ALL)01/96] ❑GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

[GF30305(ALL)01/96] ❑GAWR F (Gross Axle Weight Rating Front)

[GF30307(ALL)01/96] ❑GAWR R (Gross Axle Weight Rating Rear)

*[GF30310(ALL)01/96] ❑GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)

*[GF30320(ALL)01/96] ❑Maximum Trailer Weight Rating

*[GF30330(ALL)01/96] ❑Maximum Trailer Weight

*[GF30340(ALL)01/96] ❑Trailer Weight Range

*[GF30351(ALL)01/96] Base Curb Weight

*[GF30401(ALL)01/96] The Base Curb Weight is the weight of thevehicle including fuel, coolants, lubricants,emergency tools, spare wheel and tire. It alsoincludes any equipment that is standard on thatmodel. It does not include passengers, cargo oroptional equipment installed by factory, dealer,aftermarket supplier or customer.

*[GF30451(ALL)01/96] Payload

*[GF30501(ALL)01/96] Payload is the combined, maximum allowableweight of cargo, occupants and optionalequipment that the truck is designed to carry. Itis Gross Vehicle Weight Rating minus the basecurb weight.

*[GF30550(ALL)01/96] Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)

*[GF30650(ALL)01/96] It is important to remember that GVW is not alimit or a specification. If an owner loads up avehicle and weighs it, that’s the GVW at thatmoment. If the owner piles on more of a loadand weighs it again, that becomes the GVW.

%*[GF30701(ALL)01/96] Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

*[GF30750(ALL)01/96] To avoid overloading a vehicle, the ownershould observe the manufacturer’s specifiedGross Vehicle Weight Rating. The GVWR is themaximum total weight of base vehicle,passengers, optional components and cargo thata particular vehicle was designed to carry.


185

%*[GF30801(ALL)01/96] Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

*[GF30850(ALL)01/96] We have all seen a car or a truck that is loadeddown in the rear and riding high in the front.This is a dangerous condition that usually meansthat the rear suspension components are undersevere strain and that vehicle handling isimpaired. There is more to carrying a load thanjust payload or GVWR.

*[GF30901(ALL)01/96] Your Safety Compliance Certification Label notonly gives the GVWR, it also gives the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) which is thecarrying capacity for each axle system. Fortrucks, the rear axle will be designed to carrymore weight than the front.

*[GF30950(ALL)01/96] The rating is based on the carrying capacity ofthe lowest rated axle and suspension componentas well as other factors. This is why it’s soimportant to observe vehicle loading ratings.Overloading a vehicle punishes components andcan lead to shortened service life or outrightfailure.

*[GF31001(ALL)01/96] The capacity of the tires is included as part ofthe axle and suspension system, which is to beconsidered when determining the lowest ratedcomponent. Tires are rated to carry a specificmaximum load at a specific maximum tirepressure.

*[GF31050(ALL)01/96] Passenger car type tires when installed on lighttrucks and multipurpose passenger vehicles arerated at 10% lower load carrying capacity due tothe differences in vehicle usages.

*[GF31101(ALL)01/96] The vehicle must not be loaded to both the frontand rear GAWR because the GVWR will beexceeded. The GAWR of the front and rear axlesexceeds the GVWR when added together toallow flexibility in fore and aft loading of cargo.


186

*[GF31110(ALL)03/96] With the tires inflated to the specified pressure,the total weight of your vehicle must not exceedthe GVWR and GAWR specified on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label. This includes fullfuel tank(s), vehicle equipment, and occupants aswell as the cargo load.

*[GF31120(ALL)01/96] GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)

*[GF31130(ALL)01/96] GCWR is the maximum combined weight of thetowing vehicle (including passengers and cargo)and the loaded trailer. The GCWR is specifiedby the manufacturer to indicate the combinedmaximum loaded weight that the vehicle isdesigned to tow.

*[GF31140(ALL)01/96] Maximum Trailer Weight Rating

*[GF31150(ALL)01/96] The maximum trailer weight rating is themaximum weight of a trailer the vehicle ispermitted to tow. It is specified by themanufacturer and is determined by subtractingthe vehicle curb weight for eachengine/transmission combination, any requiredoption weight for trailer towing and the weightof the driver from the GCWR for the towingvehicle.

*[GF31160(ALL)01/96] Maximum Trailer Weight

*[GF31170(ALL)01/96] The maximum trailer weight is the maximumweight of a trailer the loaded vehicle ispermitted to tow. It is determined by subtractingthe weight of the loaded towingvehicle (including passengers and cargo) fromthe GCWR for the towing vehicle.

*[GF31180(ALL)01/96] Trailer Weight Range

*[GF31190(ALL)01/96] The trailer weight range is a specified range byweight, which the trailer must fall within,ranging from zero to the maximum trailerweight rating.


187

%*[GF31301(ALL)01/96] Calculating The Load

*[GF31350(ALL)01/96] To know how much weight your vehicle cancarry:

*[GF31401(ALL)03/96] ❑Obtain ratings from your Safety ComplianceCertification Label, and the Trailer towingspecifications in the Owner Guide (refer tothe Index)

*[GF31450(ALL)01/96] — Refer to the following sample illustrationto locate the various ratings on yourSafety Compliance Certification Label.

*[GF31501(ALL)01/96] — If you do not plan on pulling a trailer, donot include these ratings into yourcalculations.

*[GF31550(ALL)01/96] ❑Weigh your vehicle as you customarilyoperate the vehicle (without cargo).

*[GF31601(ALL)01/96] ❑Subtract the total weight of passengers, driverand optional equipment added by the factory,dealer or aftermarket supplier to determinehow much cargo weight you can carry.

*[GF31702(ALL)01/96] If you suspect that your payload is excessive,have your vehicle weighed at a highway weighstation or appropriate commercial facility. Weighthe total vehicle and trailer (if applicable), thenseparately weigh the vehicle at the front andrear wheels. And finally, weigh the trailerseparately if applicable.


188

*[GF31751(ALL)01/96] Use this chart to perform your calculations.

[GF31805(ALL)01/96]

twenty-six pica chart:0021098-B

*[GF31851(ALL)01/96] NOTE: The Truck Safety ComplianceCertification Label has two weightrelated entries that sometimes causeconfusion.

*[GF31901(ALL)01/96] Front Axle Reserve Capacity in Pounds (kgs): Ifthis value is given as 83 pounds (38 kgs) on thelabel, does this mean that you are limited toadding only 83 pounds (38 kgs) of accessories tothe front end capacity? Not exactly. This says


189

that you can load 83 pounds (38 kgs) of optionson the front axle, add 150 pound (68 kgs)passengers to all seating positions, and addevenly distributed cargo in the box withoutexceeding the GAWR F.

*[GF31950(ALL)01/96] It is possible to hang heavier equipment on thefront as long as the vehicle owner/operatorcompensates. This can be accomplished, ifnecessary, by carrying fewer passengers, lesscargo or positioning cargo more toward the rear,which has the effect of reducing the load on thefront. Keep in mind that the GAWR F, GAWRR, nor the GVWR should ever be exceeded.

*[GF32001(ALL)06/96] Total Accessory Reserve Capacity in Pounds(kgs): If, for example, this value is given as 112pounds (51 kgs), does this mean that you arelimited to adding 112 pounds (51 kgs) ofaccessories to your vehicle? Yes, that is correctfor permanently installed accessories. This is anumber that is related to government crash teststandards. Therefore, no more than this weightshould be permanently installed on your vehicle.

*[GF32050(ALL)01/96] In the case of both these numbers (83 and 112pounds) (38 and 51 kgs), the important thing toremember is that for safe operation, anowner/operator should calculate the amount andthe distribution of all weights (passengers,accessory equipment and cargo). These combinedweights should fall below the vehicle’s GVWRand GAWR.

*[GF32201(ALL)01/96] Trailers

*[GF32251(ALL)01/96] Towing a trailer safely means having the properweight on the tongue (usually 10% of the trailerweight). Load-equalizing hitches on large rigsmay transfer weight to each of the vehicle’saxles. This weight must be included in capacitycalculations when determining if the vehicle isloaded within safe limits.


190

*[GF32301(ALL)01/96] If your vehicle exceeds the GVWR, remove cargofrom your vehicle accordingly. If your vehicleexceeds the GAWR for either axle, shift the loador remove cargo accordingly.


Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWRspecified on the Safety ComplianceCertification Label.


Towing trailers beyond the maximumrecommended gross trailer weight couldresult in engine damage, transmission/axledamage, structural damage, loss of control,and personal injury.

*[GF32450(ALL)01/96] Use the Safety Compliance Certification Label tofind the axle code number and the engine typefor your vehicle.

*[GF32500(ALL)01/96] Use the appropriate Maximum Gross CombinedWeight Rating (GCWR) chart to find theMaximum GCWR for your type engine and rearaxle ratio.

*[GF32551(ALL)01/96] Subtract your Loaded Vehicle Weight from theMaximum GCWR found in the chart. This is themaximum trailer weight your vehicle can towand must fall below the maximum shown underTrailer Weight on the chart.


191

[GF33400(ALL)05/96]

thirty-six pica chart:0095089-B


192

[GF33500(ALL)01/96]

twelve pica chart:0020157-D


193

*[GF33645(ALL)01/96] Automatic Transmissions

[GF33650(ALL)05/96]

thirty-two pica chart:0095069-B

*[GF36500(ALL)05/96] Preparing to Tow

*[GF36550(ALL)05/96] For your safety and for the good of yourvehicle, use the right equipment for the type oftrailer you tow. Also, make sure that all towingequipment is properly attached to your vehicle.


194

If you are not certain that you are using theright equipment in the proper manner, see yourFord or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.

[GF36560(ALL)01/96] Under certain circumstances, the trailer frontalarea is not to exceed the base vehicle frontalarea, no matter what size engine your vehiclehas:

[GF36570(ALL)01/96] ❑ If you drive on roads with steep grades or onroads with moderate grades that are 5 miles(8 km) or longer.

[GF36580(ALL)01/96] ❑ If outside temperature in which you travel isabove 100˚F (38˚C).

%*[GF36600(ALL)01/96] Hitches

*[GF36650(ALL)01/96] For towing trailers up to 2,000 lb (907 kg), use aweight carrying hitch and ball which uniformlydistributes the trailer tongue loads through theunderbody structure. Use a frame-mountedweight distributing hitch for trailers over 2,000lb (907 kg).

*[GF36800(ALL)01/96] Do not install a single or multi-clamp typebumper hitch, or a hitch which attaches to theaxle. Underbody mounted hitches are acceptableif installed properly. Follow towing instructionsof a reputable rental agency.

*[GF37000(ALL)01/96] Whenever a trailer hitch and hardware areremoved, make sure all mounting holes in theunderbody are properly sealed to preventnoxious gases or water from entering.

%*[GF37800(ALL)01/96] Safety Chains

*[GF37900(ALL)01/96] Always use safety chains between your vehicleand trailer. Cross chains under the trailer tongueand allow slack for turning corners. Connectsafety chains to the vehicle frame or hookretainers. Never attach chains to the bumper.


195

%*[GF38000(ALL)01/96] Trailer Brakes

*[GF38100(ALL)01/96] Separate trailer brakes are required on mosttowed vehicles weighing over 1,500 lb (680 kg).


Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brakesystem directly to your vehicle’s brakesystem. Your vehicle may not haveenough braking power and your chancesof having a collision greatly increase.

%*[GF38300(ALL)01/96] Trailer Lamps

*[GF38400(ALL)01/96] Make sure your trailer lamps conform to Federaland local regulations.

*[GF38425(ALL)01/96] Class I and Class II Trailer Tow electrical wiringprovides two circuits (right hand and left hand)to operate trailer stop/turn tail lamps. Eachstop/turn circuit will operate one combinationstop/turn light bulb (# 1157, 3157, 2357, or 3357)on the trailer. Never add more than one trailerlight bulb to one circuit.


Always replace a fuse with one that hasthe specified amperage rating. Using afuse with a higher amperage rating cancause severe wire damage and could starta fire.

*[GF38500(ALL)01/96] Driving while you tow

*[GF38520(ALL)05/96] Be especially careful when driving while youtow a trailer. Never drive faster than 45 mph(70 km/h) when you tow in hilly country onhot days. Also, anticipate stops so that you canbrake gradually.


196

%*[GF38540(ALL)05/96] If you use the speed control while you aretowing on very long, steep grades, the speedcontrol may shut off.

[GF38600(ALL)05/96] When towing a trailer in hilly terrain, with avehicle equipped with an automatic overdrivetransmission, you may wish to operate in Drive(by cancelling Overdrive with OVERDRIVE OFFbutton) rather than j (Overdrive). This willeliminate excessive downshifting and upshiftingto maintain speed. Switch back to Overdrivewhenever practical for optimum powertraincooling. This can be accomplished by pushing inthe switch located on the end of the indicatorlever.

*[GF38800(ALL)03/96] When descending a steep grade with a trailer,operate in Drive rather than Overdrive. Ifadditional braking is needed, shift the automatictransmission gearshift into the 2 (Second) or 1(Low) position.

[GF38925(ALL)01/96] Servicing your vehicle if you tow

*[GF38950(ALL)05/96] If you tow a trailer for a long distance, yourvehicle will need to be serviced more frequentlythan usual. Refer to the Maintenance Schedulebooklet for additional information.

*[GF39000(ALL)01/96] Trailer Towing Tips

*[GF39100(ALL)01/96] Before starting on a trip, practice turning,stopping and backing in an area away fromheavy traffic. Get to know the “feel” of thevehicle/trailer combination.

*[GF39200(ALL)01/96] Practice backing up. Back up very slowly, withsomeone outside at the rear of your trailer toguide you. Place your hand at the bottom of thesteering wheel and move it in the direction youwant the rear of the trailer to swing. Slightmovement of the steering wheel results in amuch larger movement of the rear of the trailer.


197

*[GF39300(ALL)01/96] Allow more room for stopping with a trailerattached. Trailer brakes should be applied first,whether manually or automatically controlled,when approaching a stop.

*[GF39400(ALL)01/96] For a good handling truck-trailer combination,the trailer tongue load should be approximately10-15% of the loaded trailer weight.

*[GF39500(ALL)01/96] Make a thorough check of your equipmentbefore starting out on the road. After you havetraveled about 50 miles (80 km) stop in aprotected area and double-check your hitch andelectrical connections. Also check trailer wheellug nuts for tightness.

*[GF39600(ALL)01/96] When turning, drive slightly beyond the normalturning point so the trailer wheels will clearcurbs or other obstructions.

*[GF39725(ALL)01/96] When stopped in traffic for long periods of timein hot weather, place the gearshift selector leverin P (PARK) to increase the engine idle speed.This aids in engine cooling and air conditionerefficiency. If the engine overheats, move thefunction selector knob to VENT to stop thecompressor and increase the engine speed for ashort time.


Do not tow a trailer when using atemporary spare tire.

*[GF39900(ALL)01/96] Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on agrade. However, if you must park on a grade,place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels asfollows:

*[GF40000(ALL)01/96] ❑Apply the brake pedal and hold.

*[GF40100(ALL)01/96] ❑Have another person place the wheel chocksunder the trailer wheels.


198

*[GF40200(ALL)01/96] ❑With the chocks in place, release the brakepedal, making sure the chocks are holding.

[GF40350(ALL)01/96] ❑Apply the parking brake by pressing thebrake pedal down firmly with your right footwhile applying the parking brake with yourright hand.

*[GF40575(ALL)01/96] ❑Shift the gearshift lever into P (Park).

*[GF40600(ALL)01/96] To start, after being parked on a grade:

*[GF40700(ALL)01/96] ❑Apply the brake pedal and hold.

*[GF40800(ALL)01/96] ❑Start the engine.

*[GF40900(ALL)01/96] ❑Shift transmission into gear and release theparking brake.

*[GF41000(ALL)01/96] ❑Release the brake pedal and move the vehicleuphill to free the wheel chocks.

*[GF41100(ALL)01/96] ❑Apply the brake pedal and hold whileanother person retrieves the chocks.

[GF41200(ALL)01/96] Luggage Rack (If equipped)

[GF41300(ALL)01/96] Always distribute your luggage load evenly. Donot load more than 100 pounds (45 kg) ontorack or cause the vehicle to exceed the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).

[GF41400(ALL)01/96] The crossbars and cross slats are adjustable.Loosen the adjustment screws, slide the bars andslats as necessary, and retighten the screws.


Be sure that items on the roof rack aresecurely fastened.

[GF41600(ALL)01/96] Use caution to avoid scratching the paint. Drivecarefully and avoid sudden starts and stops.


199

Roadside Emergencies

%*[ER00105(ALL)03/96] Hazard Flasher

*[ER00110(ALL)01/96] The hazard flasher is used to alert other driversto hazardous situations.

*[ER00115(ALL)01/96] The flashers will continue to flash with the brakepedal depressed.

*[ER00120(ALL)01/96] The flashers work whether your vehicle isrunning or not. The flashers work for up to twohours when the battery is fully charged and ingood condition without draining the batteryexcessively. If the flashers run for longer thantwo hours or if the battery is not fully charged,the battery power can be drained.

*[ER00125(ALL)01/96] To use the hazard flasher:

*[ER00130(ALL)01/96] 1. Push in the flasher button; it will pop outand the lamps will begin to flash.

*[ER00135(ALL)01/96] 2. To stop the flashers, push in the flasherbutton again.

*[ER00140(ALL)01/96] NOTE: The flasher button will be sticking upslightly higher when on than when off.

[ER00150(ALL)05/96]


Hazard flasher

File:10cpera.exUpdate:Thu Jun 6 14:45:00 1996

200

*[ER00200(ALL)05/96] If the Engine Cranks But DoesNot Start or Does Not Start Aftera Collision

*[ER00250(ALL)05/96] The Fuel Pump Shut-off Switch

*[ER00260(ALL)05/96] If the engine cranks but does not start or if youhave had a collision, the fuel pump shut-offswitch may have been triggered. The shut-offswitch is a device that stops the fuel pumpwhen your vehicle has been involved in asubstantial jolt.

*[ER00275(ALL)05/96] For information on how to check and reset thefuel pump shut-off switch, see Fuel pump shut-offswitch in the Index.

%*[ER00400(ALL)05/96] Fuses

*[ER00410(ALL)01/96] Fuses and circuit breakers protect your vehicle’selectrical system from overloading. If electricalparts in your vehicle are not working, thesystem may have been overloaded and blown afuse or tripped a circuit breaker. Before youreplace or repair any electrical parts, check theappropriate fuses or circuit breakers.

*[ER00415(ALL)01/96] The following charts tell you which fuses orcircuit breakers protect each electrical part ofyour vehicle. If a fuse blows or a circuit breakeropens a circuit, all the parts of your vehicle thatuse that circuit will not work.


201

[ER00418(ALL)05/96]

thirty-six pica chart:0020388-M


202

[ER00420(ALL)01/96]

fourteen pica chart:0095064-A


203

[ER00425(ALL)01/96]

fullpageart:0020516-I

Fuses

and

their

location(u

nd

erin

strum

ent

pan

elon

driver’s

side)

File:10cpera.exU

pdate:T

hu Jun 6 14:45:00 1996

204

[ER00430(ALL)05/96]

thirty-two pica chart:0095066-B


205

[ER00435(ALL)05/96]



206

[ER00440(ALL)05/96]

ten pica chart:0095068-B


207

[ER00445(ALL)05/96]

thirty-sixpicachart:0095065-B

File:10cpera.exU

pdate:T

hu Jun 6 14:45:00 1996

208

*[ER00450(ALL)01/96] To remove and replace a fuse, use the fusepuller provided.

[ER00455(ALL)01/96]


The side view of a fuse

*[ER00460(ALL)01/96]RWARNING

Always replace a fuse with one that hasthe specified amperage rating. Using afuse with a higher amperage rating cancause severe wire damage and could starta fire.

[ER00470(ALL)01/96] Access to the trailer tow fuse is through the rearmost storage compartment in the side trimpanel. This is on the left for all Aerostar models.

[ER00475(ALL)01/96] 1. Remove the screws located inside thecompartment and take off the access holecover.

[ER00480(ALL)01/96] 2. Reach in through access hole to removefuses. The fuses are located on the side ofthe bracket assembly.

[ER00485(ALL)01/96] 3. Replace fuses with standard push-in fuses(plug type).

[ER00490(ALL)01/96] 4. Reinstall compartment back and screw intoplace.

*[ER00500(ALL)04/96] Even after you replace a fuse, it may continue toblow if you do not find what caused theoverload. If the fuse continues to blow, haveyour electrical system checked.


209

%*[ER00510(ALL)05/96] Circuit Breakers

[ER00515(ALL)01/96] If you need to check a circuit breaker, locate thefuse panel first. Otherwise, locate the circuitbreaker according to the instructions on thecharts given earlier in this chapter.

*[ER00520(ALL)01/96] However, you should know that the circuitbreakers will reset themselves and allow theelectrical parts to work again once the overloadon the circuit is removed. If the circuit breakerscontinue to cut off electricity, have your vehicle’selectrical system checked.

*[ER00525(ALL)01/96] Diagnostic equipment is needed to check circuitbreakers. Refer to the manufacturer’sinstructions.

[ER00530(ALL)01/96] If you replace a circuit breaker, use one with thesame amperage rating. To remove a circuitbreaker, grip it with your finger and thumb andpull it straight out of its socket.

%*[ER03600(ALL)02/96] Changing a Tire

*[ER03700(ALL)02/96] If you get a flat tire while you are driving, donot apply the brake heavily. Instead, graduallydecrease the speed. Hold the steering wheelfirmly and slowly move to a safe place on theside of the road. Park on a level spot, turn offthe ignition, set the parking brake, and turn onthe hazard flashers.

%*[ER03800(ALL)01/96] The Conventional Spare Tire

*[ER03900(ALL)05/96] If you have the conventional spare tire, you canuse it as a spare or as a regular tire. This sparetire is identical to the other tires that come withyour vehicle, although the wheel may not match.


210

%*[ER04000(ALL)02/96] The Temporary Spare Tire

%*[ER04100(ALL)02/96] You may have a high pressure temporary sparetire. This spare tire is smaller than a regular tireand is designed for emergency use only. Use itonly when you get a flat tire and replace it assoon as you can. This spare tire is marked withthe words “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” so thatyou can easily identify it.


If you use the temporary spare tirecontinuously or do not follow theseprecautions, the tire could fail, causingyou to lose control of the vehicle, possiblyinjuring yourself or others.

[ER04250(ALL)01/96]RWARNING

The tire size on the E-4WD must bemaintained.

[ER04260(ALL)01/96] Your vehicle may have a full diameter minispare or a full size tire. This full diameter minispare is special for the E-4WD and another minispare from another vehicle can not besubstituted without the possibility of damage toyour vehicle. All tires should be inflated to themanufacturer’s recommended pressures.


To avoid injury, never run the enginewith one wheel off the ground, such aswhen changing a tire.

*[ER04280(ALL)01/96] Extended use of other than matching size sparetires on a Traction-Lok axle could result in apermanent reduction in effectiveness. This loss ofeffectiveness does not affect normal driving andshould not be noticeable to the driver.


211

*[ER04300(ALL)02/96] When you drive with the temporary spare tire,DO NOT:

*[ER04400(ALL)02/96] ❑exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) under anycircumstances.

*[ER04500(ALL)02/96] ❑ load your vehicle so that it is heavier thanthe maximum vehicle load rating listed onthe tire decal.

*[ER04600(ALL)02/96] ❑ tow a trailer.

*[ER04700(ALL)02/96] ❑use tire chains on this tire.

*[ER04800(ALL)02/96] ❑ try to repair the temporary spare tire orremove it from its wheel.

*[ER04900(ALL)02/96] ❑use the wheel for any other type of vehicle.

*[ER05000(ALL)02/96] ❑drive through an automatic car wash withthis tire. Because the temporary spare tire issmaller than a conventional tire, it reducesthe ground clearance. Your vehicle may getcaught in the rails and it could be damaged.

%*[ER05100(ALL)02/96] Spare Tire Location

[ER05200(ALL)01/96] If your vehicle is a standard length van model,the spare tire is mounted inside a carrier at theleft rear quarter panel. To remove the spare tire,remove the wing nut and plate. A flat tire canbe temporarily stowed in the same location.

[ER05300(ALL)01/96]


A side mounted spare tire


212

[ER05400(ALL)01/96] If your vehicle is the model with a standardlength body or extended length (all models), thetemporary spare tire is stowed at the rear of thevehicle under the body.

[ER05450(ALL)01/96] The standard length E-4WD model spare tire ismounted on the floor.

[ER05500(ALL)01/96] To remove underbody temporary spare tire:

[ER05600(ALL)01/96] 1. Insert lug nut wrench into the actuator holeand turn counterclockwise until the cableextends to allow the spare tire to be pulledrearward from under the vehicle.

[ER05700(ALL)04/96] 2. Slide the spare tire to the rear and removethe retainer from the wheel.

[ER05800(ALL)01/96] 3. To stow cable/retainer with spare tireremoved, insert cable fitting into carrier rearwall slot, place wheel retainer against thecarrier, and turn lug nut wrench clockwiseuntil slack is removed.


213

[ER05900(ALL)01/96]


Temporary spare tire location and assembly

[ER06000(ALL)01/96] To stow underbody temporary spare tire:

[ER06100(ALL)01/96] 1. Insert lug nut wrench into the actuator holeand turn counterclockwise until thecable/retainer is extended for insertion intothe wheel.

[ER06200(ALL)04/96] 2. Install the retainer through wheel centerwith valve stem facing up.


214

[ER06300(ALL)01/96] 3. Rotate wrench clockwise until tire is secured.(Raising mechanism will slip.)

[ER06400(ALL)04/96] 4. Check for proper seating against underbodysupports and retighten if necessary.

[ER06500(ALL)01/96]


Spare tire — underbody carrier


Do not stow any conventional spare tireor flat temporary spare tire in theunderbody position. Doing so may causedamage to the tire, rear axle, or brakelines. (Standard length only)

[ER06800(ALL)01/96] A flat tire can be temporarily secured to thefloor pan under the rear-most seat. Totemporarily secure a flat tire:

[ER06900(ALL)01/96] 1. Remove the spare tire “J” bolt, plate andwing nut from their stowed location on thejack.


215

[ER07000(ALL)01/96] 2. Position the flat tire, valve stem up, underthe rear-most seat and over the “J” boltattaching bracket on the floor pan.

[ER07100(ALL)01/96] 3. Insert the “J” hook bolt through the center ofthe wheel and hook on bracket.

[ER07200(ALL)01/96] 4. Install plate over “J” hook bolt and securewith wing nut.

[ER07300(ALL)01/96]


A Stowed position of “J” bolt, plate and wing nut(Standard length model)

[ER07400(ALL)01/96]


Flat tire stowage (Standard length model)


216

[ER07600(ALL)01/96]


Extended van underbody outside spare wheel/flat tirestorage


Make sure the spare tire and jackingequipment are stowed and secured in theproper storage location.

%*[ER15200(ALL)03/96] Preparing to Change the Tire

*[ER15250(ALL)01/96] NOTE: To lift your vehicle by other than thefront or rear jacking points, be sure touse only hoist adapters with a widecontact surface.

*[ER15325(ALL)03/96] 1. Make sure that your vehicle will not moveor roll. Put the gearshift in P (Park). Set theparking brake and block the wheel that isdiagonally opposite the tire that you arechanging.

*[ER15335(ALL)01/96] NOTE: Make sure the ignition is in the OFFposition.


217

*[ER15420(ALL)03/96] When one of the back wheels is off the ground,the transmission alone will not prevent thevehicle from moving or slipping off the jack,even if the vehicle is in P (Park). To prevent thevehicle from moving when you change a tire, besure the parking brake is set, then block thewheel (both directions) that is diagonallyopposite (other side and end of the vehicle) tothe tire being changed.


If the vehicle slips off the jack, you orsomeone else could be seriously injured.

*[ER15550(ALL)01/96] 2. Get out the spare tire and jack.

[ER15600(ALL)01/96] The jack, jack handle and lug nut wrench arestowed separately on the left hand wheelhouseinner panel on standard length models. And inthe right rear storage compartment on extendedlength models.

[ER15700(ALL)01/96]


Jack stowage


218

[ER15750(ALL)01/96]


Aerostar extended model jack pack

*[ER16800(ALL)01/96] 3. Use the tapered end of the lug nut wrenchto unscrew wheel ornaments attached byretaining screws. Remove any wheel trim.Insert the tapered end of the lug nut wrenchbehind wheel covers or hubcaps and twistoff.

*[ER16900(ALL)01/96] 4. Loosen the wheel nuts by pulling up on thehandle of the lug nut wrench about one-halfturn (counterclockwise). Do not remove thewheel lug nuts until you raise the tire off theground.

[ER17000(ALL)01/96] 5. Unfold the jack handle and lock into thejack. Use the jack handle to slide the jackunder the vehicle.


219

%*[ER17100(ALL)01/96] Removing and Replacing the Tire

%*[ER17300(ALL)01/96] 1. Positioning the jack

[ER17400(ALL)01/96] a. To raise a front wheel, place the jackunder a horizontal portion of theunderbody member behind the wheel, asshown.

[ER17500(ALL)01/96]


Front jacking point

[ER17600(ALL)01/96] b. To raise a rear wheel, place the jackunder a horizontal portion of theunderbody member ahead of the wheelas shown.

[ER17700(ALL)01/96]


Rear jacking point

[ER17800(ALL)01/96] c. Turn the jack handle clockwise until thewheel is completely off the ground.


220


Never place the jack under the rockerpanels.

*[ER21151(ALL)01/96]


*[ER21400(ALL)01/96] 2. Remove the lug nuts with the lug nutwrench.

*[ER21500(ALL)01/96] 3. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire.

*[ER21700(ALL)01/96] 4. Thread the lug nuts on the wheel studs withthe beveled face toward the wheel. Use thelug nut wrench to screw the lug nut snugagainst the wheel but do not tighten.

*[ER22200(ALL)03/96] 5. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handlecounterclockwise.

*[ER22300(ALL)01/96] 6. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lugnuts in the order shown in the followingillustration.


221

% [ER22400(ALL)04/96]


Lug nut tightening sequence


Never use wheels or lug nuts differentthan the original equipment as this coulddamage the wheel or mounting system.This damage could allow the wheels tocome off while the vehicle is beingdriven.

*[ER23500(ALL)01/96] 7. Replace any wheel covers, ornaments, or hubcaps that your vehicle has. Make sure thatthey are screwed or snapped into place.

[ER23625(ALL)01/96] 8. Put the tire, jack, and wrench away. Makesure jack is securely fastened so it doesn’trattle when you drive. The carrier isdesigned to hold the temporary spare whichcomes with your vehicle. The stowage of afull size tire in the spare tire carrier maydamage the tire or the vehicle. The flat fullsize tire should be stowed securely in thevehicle until it can be repaired.

*[ER23700(ALL)03/96] 9. Unblock the wheels.

*[ER23800(ALL)03/96] Retighten the wheel lug nuts to the specifiedtorque at 500 miles (800 km) of new vehicleoperation and at intervals specified in theMaintenance Schedule booklet.


222

*[ER24200(ALL)01/96] Also retighten to the specified torque at 500miles (800 km) of operation after any wheelchange or any time the lug nuts are loosened.


Failure to retighten wheel lug nuts atmileages specified could allow wheels tocome off while the vehicle is in motion.

[ER24315(ALL)01/96]

eight pica chart:0020313-A

%*[ER24400(ALL)02/96] Jump-Starting Your Vehicle

*[ER24410(ALL)02/96] Your vehicle’s battery may die if you leave thelights on or any electrical equipment on afteryou turn the engine off. If this happens, youmay be able to jump-start your vehicle with abooster battery.


The gases around the battery can explodeif exposed to flames, sparks, or litcigarettes. An explosion could result ininjury or vehicle damage.


To protect yourself when charging abattery, always shield your face and eyes.Make sure that you can breathe fresh air.


223

%*[ER24440(ALL)02/96]RWARNING

Applying too much pressure on the endswhen lifting a battery could cause acid tospill. Lift the battery with a carrier orwith your hands on the opposite corners.

%*[ER24450(ALL)05/96]RWARNING

Batteries contain sulfuric acid which burnsskin, eyes, and clothing.

*[ER24460(ALL)02/96] If the acid touches someone’s skin, eyes, orclothing, immediately flush the area with waterfor at least 15 minutes. If someone swallows theacid, have him or her drink lots of milk or waterfirst, then Milk of Magnesia, a beaten egg, orvegetable oil. Call a doctor immediately.


Do not push-start your vehicle. You coulddamage the catalytic converter. For furtherinformation, see Jumper Cables in theIndex.

*[ER24480(ALL)02/96] To avoid damaging your vehicle or your battery,and to avoid injury to yourself, follow thesedirections for preparing your vehicle tojump-start and connecting the jumper cables inthe order they are given. If in doubt, call forroad service.

%*[ER24490(ALL)02/96] Preparing Your Vehicle

*[ER24500(ALL)02/96] 1. Your vehicle has a 12-volt starting system, soyou need to use a 12-volt jumper system.You will damage your starting motor,ignition system, and other electrical parts ifyou connect them to a 24-volt power supply(either two 12-volt batteries in series or a24-volt generator set).


224

*[ER24510(ALL)02/96] 2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabledvehicle. You could damage the vehicle’selectrical system.

*[ER24520(ALL)02/96] 3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood ofthe disabled vehicle. Make sure the vehiclesdo not touch each other. Set the parkingbrake on both vehicles and stay clear of theengine cooling fan and other moving parts.

*[ER24530(ALL)02/96] 4. Check all battery terminals and remove anyexcessive corrosion before you attach thejumper cables.

[ER24540(ALL)03/96] 5. Turn on the heater fan in both vehicles. Turnthe function selector knob to the Vposition. Turn off all other switches.

%*[ER24550(ALL)02/96] Connecting the jumper cables

*[ER24560(ALL)02/96] 1. Connect one end of the first jumper cable tothe positive (+) terminal of the dischargedbattery. (You can connect either jumper cableto the positive (+) terminal, as long as youuse the same cable for both positiveterminals.) Most jumper cables have a redcable and a black cable. The red cable isgenerally used for the positive terminals andthe black for the negative ones.

*[ER24570(ALL)02/96] 2. Connect the other end of the first cable tothe positive (+) terminal of the boosterbattery.

*[ER24580(ALL)02/96] 3. Connect one end of the second cable to thenegative (S) terminal of the booster battery— NOT to the discharged battery.

*[ER24590(ALL)01/96] 4. Connect the other end of that cable to agood metallic surface on the engine or frameof the disabled vehicle. The followingillustration shows where you can find ametallic surface.


225


Do not connect the end of the secondcable to the negative (S) terminal of thebattery to be jumped. A spark may causean explosion of the gases that surroundthe battery.

[ER24610(ALL)01/96]


Attaching jumper cables

*[ER24620(ALL)02/96] Jump-Starting

*[ER24630(ALL)02/96] 1. Make sure that the jumper cables are not inthe way of moving engine parts, then startthe booster vehicle. Run the engine at amoderate speed.

*[ER24640(ALL)02/96] 2. Let the discharged battery charge for a fewminutes and then start the disabled vehicle.It may take a couple of tries before thevehicle starts. If the vehicle does not startafter several attempts, there may be adifferent problem.

*[ER24650(ALL)02/96] 3. When both vehicles are running, let themidle for a few minutes to charge thedischarged battery.


226

%*[ER24660(ALL)02/96] Removing jumper cables

*[ER24670(ALL)02/96] 1. Always remove the jumper cables in thereverse order. Remove the negative (S) endof the jumper cable from the metallic surfaceon the engine or frame of the disabledvehicle.

*[ER24680(ALL)03/96] 2. Remove the negative (S) cable from thebooster battery.

*[ER24690(ALL)02/96] 3. Remove the positive (+) cable from thebooster battery.

*[ER24692(ALL)02/96] 4. Remove the other end of the positive (+)cable from the discharged battery.

*[ER24694(ALL)02/96] After the vehicle is started, let it idle for a whileto let the engine “relearn” its idle conditions.Drive it around for a while with all electricalaccessories turned off to let the battery recharge.Driveability may be deteriorated slightly until alldrive modes are “relearned.” You may need touse a battery charger to fully recharge thebattery.

*[ER24695(ALL)03/96] If you need to replace your battery, see Batteryin the Maintenance and Care chapter.

%*[ER24700(ALL)04/96] Towing Your Vehicle[ER24750(ALL)01/96] The recommended method to tow your Aerostar

is with flatbed or wheel lift equipment.However, slingbelt towing is acceptable. Onvehicles equipped with an under-vehicle sparetire carrier, remove the tire assembly from thecarrier and store it in a secure area beforetowing. For E-4WD vehicles, the 4-wheel drivesystem must be disabled prior to towing. Thetransmission must be in N (Neutral) and theignition switch must be in the OFF position todisable the Electronic 4-Wheel Drive System.


227

[ER24775(ALL)01/96]

two third page art:0095060-A


229

Maintenance and Care

%*[MC00300(ALL)01/96] Service Made Easy

*[MC00400(ALL)01/96] Ford has two goals for servicing your vehicle.

*[MC00500(ALL)01/96] 1. When we can, we design parts that do notneed to be serviced.

*[MC00600(ALL)01/96] 2. We want to make servicing your vehicle aseasy as possible. To help you:

*[MC00700(ALL)01/96] ❑We highlight do-it-yourself items in yellow inthe engine compartment so that you can findthem easily.

*[MC00800(ALL)03/96] ❑When possible, we design parts that can bereplaced without tools.

*[MC00900(ALL)02/96] ❑We give you a Maintenance Schedule thatmakes tracking routine service for yourvehicle easy. The maintenance schedule islocated in the Maintenance Schedule booklet.

*[MC01000(ALL)01/96] This chapter tells you about the basic parts thatyou need to check and service regularly.

*[MC01050(ALL)01/96] If your vehicle needs professional servicing, yourdealership can provide the parts and servicerequired. Check your Warranty Information Bookletto find out which parts and services are covered.Also see the Customer Assistance chapter of thisOwner Guide.

*[MC01300(ALL)03/96] Ford Motor Company recommends that youperform the Owner Maintenance Checks listed inthe Maintenance Schedule booklet. These servicesare important for the proper operation of yourvehicle. In addition to the conditions listed inthe Owner Maintenance Checklist, be alert for

File:11cpmca.exUpdate:Fri Jun 7 14:30:56 1996

230

any unusual noise, vibration, or other indicationthat your vehicle may need service. If you donotice something unusual, see that your vehicleis serviced promptly.

*[MC01350(ALL)01/96] Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids,and service parts conforming to Fordspecifications. Motorcraft parts are designed andbuilt to provide the best performance in yourvehicle. Using these parts for replacement isyour assurance that Ford-built quality stays inyour vehicle.

%*[MC01400(ALL)05/96] NOTE: Always dispose of used automotivefluids in a responsible manner. Followyour community’s standards fordisposing of these types of fluids. Callyour local recycling center to find outabout recycling automotive fluids.

%*[MC01600(ALL)01/96] Precautions When Servicing YourVehicle

*[MC01700(ALL)01/96] Be especially careful when inspecting orservicing your vehicle. Here are some generalprecautions for your safety:

*[MC01900(ALL)01/96] ❑ If you must work with the engine running,avoid wearing loose clothing or jewelry thatcould get caught in moving parts. Takeappropriate precautions with long hair.

*[MC02000(ALL)01/96] ❑Do not work on a vehicle in an enclosedspace with the engine running, unless you aresure you have enough ventilation.

*[MC02100(ALL)01/96] ❑Never get under a vehicle while it issupported only by a jack. If you must workunder a vehicle, use safety stands.

*[MC02200(ALL)01/96] ❑Keep all lit cigarettes and other smokingmaterials away from the battery and allfuel-related parts.


231

*[MC02500(ALL)01/96] If you disconnect the battery, the engine must“relearn” its idle conditions before your vehiclewill drive properly. To find out how the enginedoes this, see Battery in this chapter.

*[MC02600(ALL)01/96] Working with the engine off:

*[MC02650(ALL)01/96] 1. Set the parking brake fully and make surethat the gearshift is securely latched in P(Park).

*[MC02700(ALL)01/96] 2. Remove the key from the ignition after youturn the engine off.

*[MC02725(ALL)01/96] 3. Block the wheels. This will prevent yourvehicle from moving unexpectedly.

*[MC02750(ALL)01/96] Working with the engine on:

*[MC02785(ALL)01/96] 1. Set the parking brake fully and make surethat the gearshift is securely latched in P(Park).

*[MC02800(ALL)01/96] 2. Block the wheels. This will prevent yourvehicle from moving unexpectedly.

*[MC02900(ALL)01/96]RWARNING

Do not start your engine with the aircleaner removed and do not remove itwhile the engine is running.

%*[MC02950(ALL)02/96] Opening the Hood

*[MC03000(ALL)01/96] 1. Pull the hood release handle, located next tothe parking brake pedal.


232

[MC03025(ALL)01/96]


Hood release handle

*[MC03050(ALL)01/96] 2. While applying downward pressure on thehood, push the hood latch handle locatedbehind the grille near the center front of thevehicle to the left.

*[MC03100(ALL)01/96] 3. Disconnect the hood support from theretaining clip on the radiator support andplace it into the slot marked PROP in theunderside of the hood.

[MC03400(ALL)01/96]


Hood and support rod

*[MC03800(ALL)01/96] To close the hood, raise it so that the supportrod comes away from the slotted hole in thehood. Place the support rod in its retaining clipand close the hood with enough force to make itlatch. Be sure to oil the hood latch every sixmonths to maintain smooth operation.

*[MC03900(ALL)01/96] Always attempt to lift the hood after closing tobe sure it is securely latched.


233

%*[MC06000(ALL)01/96] Engine Oil Recommendations

*[MC06010(ALL)01/96] We recommend using Motorcraft oil or anequivalent oil meeting Ford SpecificationWSS-M2C153-F and displaying the AmericanPetroleum Institute CERTIFICATION MARK onthe front of the container.

*[MC06020(ALL)01/96]

one third page art:0060021-E

The API Certification Mark

*[MC06030(ALL)01/96] Never use:

*[MC06040(ALL)01/96] ❑“Non-Detergent” oils

*[MC06050(ALL)02/96] ❑Oils labeled API SA, SB, SC, SD, SE, SF or SG

%*[MC06060(ALL)01/96] ❑Additional engine oil additives, oil treatmentsor engine treatments

%*[MC06070(ALL)03/96] Engine oils with an SAE 5W-30 viscosity arePREFERRED for your vehicle. They provide thebest engine performance, fuel economy andengine protection for all climates down to -15˚F(-25˚C).

%*[MC06080(ALL)03/96] Synthetic engine oils which are CERTIFIED andof the preferred viscosity may be used in yourengine. The engine oil and oil filter must still bechanged according to the maintenance schedule.


234

*[MC06085(ALL)05/96] NOTE: Ford production and aftermarket(Motorcraft) oil filters are designed foradded engine protection and long life.If a replacement oil filter is used thatdoes not meet Ford material and designspecifications, startup engine noises orknock may be experienced. It isrecommended you use the appropriateMotorcraft oil filter (or another brandmeeting Ford specifications) for yourengine application.

%*[MC06090(ALL)01/96] Checking and Adding Engine Oil

*[MC06095(ALL)01/96] Since the proper amount of engine oil isimportant for safe engine operation, check the oilusing the dipstick each time you put fuel inyour vehicle. Remember the engine must be off,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beparked on level ground.

%*[MC06100(ALL)01/96] Checking the engine oil level:

*[MC06110(ALL)01/96] 1. Turn the engine off after it has warmed upand allow a few minutes for the engine oilto drain back into the oil pan.

*[MC06120(ALL)01/96] 2. Set the parking brake, making sure thegearshift is securely latched in P (Park).

*[MC06130(ALL)01/96] 3. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engineheat.

*[MC06140(ALL)01/96] 4. Locate the engine oil dipstick (highlighted inyellow) and carefully pull it out of theengine.

*[MC06150(ALL)01/96] 5. Wipe the dipstick clean and put it back intoposition, making sure it is fully seated.


235

[MC06160(ALL)01/96]


Engine oil dipstick

*[MC06170(ALL)03/96] 6. Carefully pull the dipstick out again. If theoil level is below the “ADD 1 QT” line, addengine oil as necessary. If the oil level isbeyond the letter “F” in Full, engine damageor high oil consumption may occur andsome oil must be removed from the engine.

*[MC06180(ALL)01/96] 7. Put the dipstick back in and make sure it isfully seated.

%*[MC06190(ALL)01/96] Adding engine oil

*[MC06200(ALL)01/96] It may be necessary to add some oil between oilchanges. Make sure you use a CERTIFIEDengine oil of the preferred viscosity. Yourvehicle’s warranty coverage may not apply ifengine damage is caused by the use of improperengine oil.

*[MC06210(ALL)01/96] Add engine oil through the oil filler caphighlighted in yellow. To add oil, remove thefiller cap and use a funnel to pour oil into theopening. Be careful not to overfill the engine.Recheck the oil level after you finish adding oil.

[MC07000(ALL)05/96] Engine Oil and Filter Changes

*[MC07100(ALL)05/96] Change your engine oil and oil filter accordingto these mileage and time requirements,whichever occurs first.


236

*[MC07200(ALL)05/96]


Oil change intervals

*[MC07300(ALL)05/96] Refer to the Maintenance Schedule booklet foradditional information.

%*[MC08000(ALL)05/96] Brake Fluid

*[MC08025(ALL)01/96] Your vehicle is equipped with a brake fluid levelindicator in the master cylinder which lights theBRAKE warning light on the instrument panelwhen the brake fluid level is low.

*[MC08050(ALL)01/96] Under normal circumstances, your vehicleshould not use up brake fluid rapidly. However,expect the level of the brake fluid to slowly fallas you put more mileage on your vehicle andthe brake pads wear.

*[MC08075(ALL)01/96] Check the brake fluid at least once a year. Youcan do this by looking at the fluid level in theplastic brake fluid reservoir on the mastercylinder. The fluid level should be at or near theMAX mark.


Brake fluid is toxic.


237

*[MC08100(ALL)01/96] If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes withrunning water for 15 minutes. Get medicalattention if irritation persists. If taken internally,drink water and induce vomiting. Get medicalattention immediately.

%*[MC08125(ALL)03/96] If the fluid is low, carefully clean and removethe filler cap from the reservoir. Fill thereservoir to the MAX line with Ford HighPerformance DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-ABor DOT 3 equivalent fluid meeting Fordspecification ESA-M6C25-A.

*[MC08150(ALL)01/96] NOTE: If brake fluid is spilled on paintedsurfaces, it must be flushed and wipedaway immediately. Brake fluid maydissolve the paint finish on yourvehicle.


If you use a brake fluid that is not DOT3, you will cause permanent damage toyour brakes.

*[MC08200(ALL)01/96] Do not fill the reservoir above the MAX line.

*[MC08225(ALL)01/96] If you find that the fluid level is excessively low— below the seam or ridge on the outside of theplastic reservoir — have the brake systeminspected.


Do not let the reservoir for the mastercylinder run dry. This may cause thebrakes to fail.


238

[MC08300(ALL)01/96]


Brake master cylinder reservoir

%*[MC08500(ALL)02/96] Windshield Washer Fluid

*[MC08520(ALL)02/96] Check the level of the windshield washer fluidevery time you stop for fuel. The reservoir forthe windshield washer fluid is located in theengine compartment.


Do not put windshield washer fluid in thecontainer for the engine coolant.

[MC08540(ALL)01/96]


Windshield washer reservoir


239

%*[MC08550(ALL)02/96] Use specially formulated windshield washerfluid rather than plain water, because speciallyformulated washer fluids contain additives thatdissolve road grime. For safety reasons, washerfluids containing an appropriate antifreeze suchas methanol should be used in freezing weather(temperatures below 32˚F [0˚C]). State or localregulations on Volatile Organic Compounds(VOCs) may restrict use of the most commonantifreeze, methanol. Washer fluids containingnon-methanol antifreeze agents should be usedonly if they provide cold weather protectionwithout damaging the vehicle’s paint finish,wiper blades, and windshield washer system.

*[MC08560(ALL)01/96] If you choose to use a windshield washingsolution that must be mixed, follow themanufacturer’s mixing instructions. Improperlymixed solutions may freeze unexpectedly.


Windshield washer fluid containsmethanol which is poisonous.

[MC08570(ALL)04/96] Checking/adding the washer fluid for theliftgate

[MC08580(ALL)01/96] Check the liftgate washer reservoir regularly.This is not the same reservoir your frontwindshield wipers use. The opening for thisreservoir is on the right side of the liftgate abovethe tail lamp. A fill cup is located on top of theright hand tail lamp and is accessible when theliftgate is open. Close the fill cup cover afterfilling and before closing the liftgate. Refill thisreservoir with the same solution you use foryour windshield. To find out how much washerfluid the liftgate reservoir holds, see Refillcapacities in the Index.


240

[MC08590(ALL)05/96]


Liftgate window washer reservoir

%*[MC08700(ALL)01/96] Engine Coolant%*[MC08710(ALL)01/96] Checking the Engine Coolant

*[MC08720(ALL)05/96] NOTE: Be sure to read and understandPrecautions When Servicing YourVehicle at the beginning of this chapter.

[MC08725(ALL)05/96] Your vehicle’s engine coolant protects the enginefrom overheating in the summer and fromfreezing in the winter. Check the level of theengine coolant at least once a month, butpreferably each time you stop for fuel. Simplylook at the engine coolant recovery reservoirlocated in the engine compartment. To locatethis reservoir, see the diagram of your vehicle’sengine under Engine Compartment in theCapacities and Specifications chapter.


241

*[MC08755(ALL)05/96] Adding Engine Coolant

[MC08760(ALL)01/96]


Adding engine coolant to reservoir


Do not put engine coolant in the containerfor the windshield washer fluid.

*[MC08770(ALL)05/96] When the engine is cool, add a 50/50 mixture ofengine coolant and water to the engine coolantrecovery reservoir — DO NOT ADD DIRECTLYTO THE RADIATOR. Add straight water only inan emergency, but you should replace it with a50/50 mixture of coolant and distilled water assoon as possible.

*[MC08772(ALL)05/96] Check the coolant level in the coolant recoveryreservoir the next few times you drive thevehicle. If necessary, add enough of a 50/50mixture of coolant and water to bring the liquidlevel to the fill line on the reservoir.


Never remove the coolant recovery capwhile the engine is running or hot.

[MC08780(ALL)01/96] If you must remove the coolant recovery cap,follow these steps to avoid personal injurycaused by escaping steam or engine coolant:


242

[MC08785(ALL)01/96] 1. Before you remove the cap, turn the engineoff and let it cool.

[MC08790(ALL)01/96] 2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick clotharound the cap and turn it slowly,counterclockwise to the first stop.

*[MC08800(ALL)05/96] 3. Step back while the pressure releases.

*[MC08810(ALL)05/96] 4. When you are sure that all the pressure hasbeen released, use the cloth to press the capdown, turn it counterclockwise, and removeit.

[MC08815(ALL)01/96] Use Ford Premium Engine CoolantE2FZ-19549-AA (in Canada, Motorcraft CXC-8-B)or an equivalent premium engine coolant thatmeets Ford specification ESE-M97B44-A. FordPremium Engine Coolant is an optimizedformula that will protect all metals and rubberelastomers used in Ford cooling systems for 4years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km).

*[MC08820(ALL)05/96] Do not use alcohol or methanol antifreeze or anyengine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanolantifreeze. Do not use supplemental coolantadditives in your vehicle. These additives mayharm your engine cooling system. The use of animproper coolant may void the warranty ofyour vehicle’s engine cooling system.

*[MC08825(ALL)05/96] Recycled engine coolant

*[MC08830(ALL)05/96] Ford Motor Company recommends that Fordand Lincoln-Mercury dealers use recycled enginecoolant produced by Ford-approved processes.Not all coolant recycling processes producecoolant which meets Ford specificationESE-M97B44-A, and use of such coolant mayharm engine and cooling system components.


243

*[MC08835(ALL)05/96] Always dispose of used automotive fluids in aresponsible manner. Follow your community’sregulations and standards for recycling anddisposing of automotive fluids.

*[MC08840(ALL)05/96] Coolant refill capacity

*[MC08845(ALL)05/96] To find out how much fluid your vehicle’scooling system can hold, refer to Refill capacitiesin the Capacities and specifications chapter.

*[MC08850(ALL)05/96] Have your dealer check the engine coolingsystem for leaks if you have to add more than aquart (liter) of engine coolant per month.

*[MC08855(ALL)05/96] Severe winter climate

[MC08860(ALL)01/96] If you drive in extremely cold climates (less thanS34˚F (S38˚C), it may be necessary to increasethe coolant concentration above 50%. Refer tothe chart on the coolant container to ensure thecoolant concentration in your vehicle is such thatthe coolant will not freeze at the temperaturelevel in which you drive during winter months.Never increase the engine coolant concentrationabove 60%. Leave a 50/50 mixture of enginecoolant and water in your vehicle year-round innon-extreme climates.

%*[MC08865(ALL)01/96] Checking Hoses

*[MC08870(ALL)01/96] Inspect all engine and heater system hoses fordeterioration, leaks and loose clamps beforeadding or replacing engine coolant. Makewhatever repairs or replacements that arenecessary using Motorcraft parts or theirequivalents.

%*[MC08875(ALL)05/96] Engine Coolant Drain and Flush

[MC08915(ALL)05/96] Proper procedures for flushing the coolingsystem can be found in the Service Manual, oryou can see a qualified technician.


244

[MC08970(ALL)04/96] NOTE: Due to air being trapped in the 4.0Lengine cooling system, it is notunusual to experience a 4 to 7 ounce(120 to 210 ml) coolant loss up to 7,500miles (12,000 km) after initial systemfill.

%*[MC09000(ALL)01/96] Power Steering Fluid

*[MC09020(ALL)01/96] Check the level of the power steering fluid atleast twice a year (i.e., every Spring and Fall).

%*[MC09030(ALL)01/96] Checking and Adding Power SteeringFluid

*[MC09035(ALL)04/96] 1. Start the engine and let it run until thepower steering fluid reaches normaloperating temperature. The power steeringfluid will be at the right temperature whenthe engine coolant temperature gauge in theinstrument cluster is near the center of theNORMAL operating temperature range.

*[MC09040(ALL)01/96] 2. While the engine idles, turn the steeringwheel back and forth several times. Makesure that the cap assembly is installed at thistime.

*[MC09045(ALL)01/96] 3. Turn the engine off.

%*[MC09050(ALL)01/96] 4. Check the fluid level on the dipstick (whichis highlighted in yellow in your vehicle). Thefluid level should be between the arrows inthe FULL HOT range, which is marked onthe side of the dipstick, opposite the sidemarked FULL COLD. Do not add fluid if thelevel is within the FULL HOT range.


245

*[MC09060(ALL)01/96]


Power steering dipstick

[MC09070(ALL)01/96]


Power steering reservoir

[MC09100(ALL)01/96]


Power steering reservoir


246

*[MC09200(ALL)01/96] 5. If the power steering fluid is low, add fluidin small amounts, continuously checking thelevel, until you reach the FULL HOT range.Do not overfill.

*[MC09210(ALL)03/96] 6. When you are finished, put the dipstick backin and make sure that it fits snugly.

[MC09220(ALL)01/96] Use only a power steering fluid such as FordPower Steering Fluid Motorcraft MERCONHATF.

*[MC09230(ALL)01/96] If the power steering fluid is low, do not driveyour vehicle for a long period of time beforeadding fluid. This can damage the powersteering pump.

*[MC09240(ALL)03/96] If you check the power steering fluid when it iscold, make sure that the fluid reaches the FULLCOLD range on the dipstick. The reading willonly be accurate if the fluid temperature isapproximately 50 to 85˚F (10 to 30˚C).

*[MC09250(ALL)01/96] NOTE: Do not turn the steering wheel of yourvehicle with the engine off. It couldforce power steering fluid out from thereservoir cap or in extreme cases, itcould unseat the cap.

%*[MC10000(ALL)01/96] Automatic Transmission Fluid

*[MC10100(ALL)05/96] Under normal driving conditions automatictransmission fluid should be changed every30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 21,000 miles(34,000 km) if under severe duty conditions.However, if the transmission is not workingproperly, for instance, the transmission may slipor shift slowly, or you may notice some sign offluid leakage, the fluid level should be checked.

*[MC10110(ALL)01/96] It is preferable to check the transmission fluidlevel at normal operating temperature, afterapproximately 20 miles (30 km) of driving.However, if necessary, you can check the fluid


247

level without having to drive 20 miles to obtaina normal operating temperature if outsidetemperatures are above 50˚F (10˚C).

*[MC10120(ALL)01/96] NOTE: If the vehicle has been operated for anextended period at high speeds or incity traffic during hot weather, orpulling a trailer, the vehicle should beturned off for about 30 minutes toallow the fluid to cool before checking.

%*[MC10130(ALL)01/96] Checking the Automatic TransmissionFluid

[MC10140(ALL)05/96] With the vehicle on a level surface, start theengine and move the gearshift lever through allof the gear ranges allowing sufficiant time foreach position to engage. Securely latch thegearshift lever in the P (Park) position, fully setthe parking brake and leave the engine running.


Your vehicle should not be driven if thefluid level is below the bottom hole onthe dipstick and outside temperatures areabove 50˚F (10˚C).

[MC10160(ALL)01/96] Wipe off the dipstick cap (located toward thepassenger’s side of the engine), pull the dipstickout and wipe the indicator end clean. Put thedipstick back into the filler tube and make sureit is fully seated. Pull the dipstick out and readthe fluid level.

*[MC10170(ALL)01/96] When checking fluid at normal operatingtemperature, the fluid level should be within thecrosshatched area on the dipstick. When thevehicle has not been driven, and outsidetemperature is above 50˚F (10˚C), the fluid levelshould be between the holes on the dipstick.


248

%*[MC10180(ALL)01/96] Adding Automatic Transmission Fluid

*[MC10190(ALL)01/96] The fluid type is stamped on the dipstick.Before adding any fluid, be sure that thecorrect type will be used.

*[MC10200(ALL)01/96] Add fluid in 1/2 pint (.25L) increments throughthe filler tube to bring the level to the correctarea on the dipstick. If an overfill occurs, excessfluid should be removed by a qualifiedtechnician.

%*[MC10220(ALL)05/96] NOTE: Always dispose of used automotivefluids in a responsible manner. Followyour community’s standards fordisposing of these types of fluids. Callyour local recycling center to find outabout recycling automotive fluids.

[MC10230(ALL)04/96]


Automatic transmission dipstick

%*[MC10500(ALL)01/96] Driveline Universal Joint and SlipYoke

*[MC10520(ALL)03/96] The universal joints that come standard withyour vehicle do not require lubrication. If youroriginal equipment universal joints are replacedwith universal joints equipped with greasefittings, lubrication will be necessary at theintervals shown in the Maintenance Schedulebooklet.


249

%*[MC15000(ALL)01/96] Battery

*[MC15010(ALL)01/96] Your vehicle may have a Motorcraftmaintenance-free battery. The Motorcraftmaintenance-free battery does not requireadditional water during its life of service. Thevents are part of the cover and cannot beremoved. For longer, trouble-free operation, keepthe top of the battery clean and dry. Also, makecertain the battery cables are tightly fastened tothe battery terminals.

*[MC15020(ALL)01/96] If you see any corrosion on the battery cables orterminals, remove the cables from the terminaland clean them both with a wire brush. You canneutralize the acid with a solution of bakingsoda and water. Reinstall the cables when youare done cleaning them, and apply a smallquantity of grease to the top of each batteryterminal to help prevent corrosion.

*[MC15030(ALL)01/96] Battery replacement

*[MC15040(ALL)01/96] If your original equipment battery requiresreplacement (under warranty), it may in somecases be replaced by a Motorcraftlow-maintenance battery. The low-maintenancebattery has removable vent caps for checking theelectrolyte level and for adding water, if needed.

*[MC15045(ALL)01/96] Check your battery’s electrolyte level, at leastevery 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km), intemperatures up to 90˚F (32˚C) and more oftenin temperatures above 90˚F (32˚C). Keep theelectrolyte in each cell up to the “level”indicator. Do not overfill the battery cell.

*[MC15050(ALL)01/96] If the electrolyte level in your battery gets low,you can add plain tap water to the battery, aslong as you don’t use hard water, or water witha high mineral or alkali content. If possible,however, try to only fill the battery cell withdistilled water. If the battery needs water often,have the charging system checked.


250

%*[MC15070(ALL)01/96] Help Us Protect Our Environment

*[MC15080(ALL)01/96] Ford Motor Company strongly recommends thatused lead-acid batteries be returned to anauthorized recycling facility for disposal.

*[MC15090(ALL)01/96]


Battery recycling symbol

% [MC15100(ALL)04/96] Because your vehicle’s engine is electronicallycontrolled by a computer, some controlconditions are maintained by power from thebattery. If you ever disconnect the battery, installa new battery, or experience a dead battery youmust allow the computer to “relearn” its idleconditions before your vehicle will driveproperly. To let the engine do this, put thegearshift in P (Park), turn off all the accessories,and start the vehicle. Let the engine idle for atleast one minute.

*[MC15110(ALL)01/96] If you do not let the engine relearn its idle, theidle quality of your vehicle may be adverselyaffected until the idle is relearned. Your vehiclewill eventually relearn its idle while you driveit, but it takes much longer than if you use theprevious procedure.


Batteries normally produce explosive gaseswhich can cause personal injury. Do notallow flames, sparks or lit tobacco to comenear the battery. Always cover your faceand protect your eyes and also provideventilation.


251

%*[MC15150(ALL)05/96]RWARNING

Batteries contain sulfuric acid which burnsskin, eyes, and clothing.

*[MC15170(ALL)02/96] If the acid touches someone’s skin, eyes, orclothing, immediately flush the area with waterfor at least 15 minutes. If someone swallows theacid, have him or her drink lots of milk or waterfirst, then Milk of Magnesia, a beaten egg, orvegetable oil. Call a doctor immediately.


Applying too much pressure on the endswhen lifting a battery could cause acid tospill. Lift the battery with a carrier orwith your hands on the opposite corners.

%*[MC24500(ALL)02/96] Wiper Blades

*[MC24600(ALL)01/96] Check the windshield wiper blades at least twicea year. Also check them whenever they seemless effective than usual. Substances such as treesap and some hot wax treatments used bycommercial car washes reduce the effectivenessof wiper blades.

*[MC24700(ALL)01/96] If the blades do not wipe properly, clean boththe windshield and the wiper blades. Useundiluted windshield washer solution or a milddetergent. Rinse thoroughly with clear water. Donot use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner, or othersolvents to clean your wiper blades. These willdamage your blades.

*[MC24800(ALL)01/96] To make reaching the wiper blades easy, simplyturn the ignition to the ACC position and turnyour wipers on. Wait for them to reach avertical position and turn the ignition to the OFFposition. Do not move the wipers manually.Manually moving the wipers across thewindshield may damage them.


252

*[MC24900(ALL)02/96] Wiper blade replacement

*[MC25000(ALL)01/96] If the wiper blades still do not work properlyafter you clean them, you may need to replacethe wiper blade assembly or the blade element.When replacing the wiper blade assembly, bladerefill, or wiper arm always use a Motorcraft partor equivalent. To replace the blades, follow theinstructions that come with them.

%*[MC25200(ALL)01/96] Tires

*[MC25300(ALL)03/96] Look at your tires each time you fill your fueltank. If one tire looks lower than the others,check the pressure in all of them. Always followthese precautions:

*[MC25400(ALL)02/96] ❑Use an accurate tire pressure gauge.

*[MC25500(ALL)02/96] ❑Check the tire pressure when tires are cold,after the vehicle has been parked for at leastone hour or has been driven less than 3 miles(5 km).

*[MC25600(ALL)03/96] ❑Make sure the weight of your load is evenlydistributed.

*[MC25700(ALL)03/96] ❑Adjust tire pressure to recommendedspecifications found on the Safety ComplianceCertification Label.

[MC25750(ALL)01/96] ❑Make sure the spare tire is mounted andanchored properly in the tire carrier withoutcontacting functional parts such as braketubes, fuel lines, exhaust pipes, etc.

*[MC25800(ALL)03/96] If you do not take these precautions, your tiresmay fail or go flat.

*[MC25890(ALL)03/96] Ford Motor Company recommends obeyingposted speed limits.


253


Driving too fast for conditions creates thepossibility of loss of vehicle control.Driving at very high speeds for extendedperiods of time may result in damage tovehicle components.

%*[MC26100(ALL)03/96] At least once a month, check the pressure in allyour vehicle’s tires, including the spare. Use anaccurate tire pressure gauge. Check the tirepressure when tires are cold, after the vehiclehas been parked for at least one hour or hasbeen driven less than 3 miles (5 km). You canfind proper cold pressure and load limits ofrecommended size tires on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label.


Improperly inflated tires can affect vehiclehandling and can fail suddenly, possiblyresulting in loss of vehicle control.

%*[MC26200(ALL)01/96] Tire Inspection and Maintenance

*[MC26300(ALL)03/96] Inspect the tire treads, and remove stones, nails,glass or other objects that may be wedged in thetread grooves. Check for holes or cuts that maypermit air to leak from the tire, and make thenecessary repairs.

*[MC26400(ALL)03/96] Inspect the tire side walls for cuts, bruises andother damage. If you suspect internal damage tothe tire, have it demounted and checked. Youmay need to repair or replace it.

[MC26410(ALL)01/96] Wheel inspection and maintenance

*[MC26420(ALL)03/96] Check for damage that would affect the runoutof the wheels. Wobble or shimmy will eventuallydamage the wheel bearings.


254

*[MC26430(ALL)03/96] Front wheel bearings require periodic repackingand adjustment as specified in the MaintenanceSchedule booklet. Loose or worn front wheelbearings tend to let the vehicle wander orshimmy, and can eventually cause excessive tirewear.

*[MC26435(ALL)03/96] Whenever a wheel is removed and thenre-installed, always remove any corrosion thatmay be present on the mounting surface of thewheel and/or the surface of the hub, drum orrotor that contacts the wheel.


Installing wheels without a goodmetal-to-metal contact at the wheelmounting surface can cause the wheel lugnuts to loosen and could allow the wheelto come off while the vehicle is in motion.

[MC26447(ALL)01/96]RWARNING

On-vehicle wheel balancing will causedamage to the drivetrain of E-4WDAerostars.

%*[MC26450(ALL)05/96] Traction-Lok Rear Axle(If equipped)

*[MC26460(ALL)05/96] This axle provides added drive away traction onslippery surfaces, particularly when one or morewheels are on a surface with poor traction.


To avoid injury, never run the enginewith one wheel off the ground, such aswhen changing a tire.


255

%*[MC26500(ALL)01/96] Tire Rotation

*[MC26600(ALL)01/96] Because your vehicle’s front and rear tiresperform different jobs, they often weardifferently. To make sure your tires wear evenlyand last longer, rotate them as indicated in thefollowing diagram.

*[MC26700(ALL)05/96] For tire rotation intervals, see the MaintenanceSchedule booklet. If you notice that the tires wearunevenly, have them checked.

*[MC26750(ALL)03/96] In situations where the tires differ from front torear (snow/traction), simply rotate using a sideto side pattern.

*[MC26800(ALL)01/96]


Tire rotation pattern

*[MC26900(ALL)03/96] After each rotation, adjust individual tirepressure as specified on the Safety ComplianceCertification Label. Tighten wheel lug nuts to therequired torque specification and retighten againafter 500 miles (800 km).


256

*[MC27000(ALL)03/96] If your vehicle has aluminum wheels, you maydemount the full size, non-temporary sparetire (if so equipped) and remount on analuminum wheel to rotate the spare tire intoyour vehicle’s rotation pattern. Rebalance thewheel.

[MC27100(ALL)04/96] You may discover uneven outside shoulder wearon your vehicle’s front radial tires if you driveoften in the city and turn frequently aroundcurbs. You can extend the life of your front tiresby remounting them so the outside of the tirefaces inside on the wheel rim.

%*[MC27300(ALL)01/96] Replacing the Tires

*[MC27400(ALL)01/96] Replace any tires that show wear bands. Whenyour tire shows a wear band, it has only 1/16inch (2 mm) of tread left.

*[MC27500(ALL)01/96]


Wear band

*[MC27600(ALL)02/96] Because your vehicle’s tires may wear unevenly,you may need to replace them before a wearband appears across the entire tread.

*[MC27700(ALL)03/96] Your wheels and tires are match-mounted forimproved ride. Before you begin to repair a tire,mark the wheel and tire so that they areproperly aligned when remounted. This willensure that the tires will continue to give youthe same ride level.


257


When replacing full size tires, never mixradial, bias-belted, or bias-type tires. Useonly the tire sizes that are listed on thetire pressure decal. Make sure that all tiresare the same size, speed rating, andload-carrying capacity. Use only the tirecombinations recommended on the decal.If you do not follow these precautions,your vehicle may not drive properly andsafely.


Make sure that all replacement tires are ofthe same size, type, load-carrying capacity,and tread design (e.g. “All Terrain”, etc.),as originally offered by Ford.


Do not replace your tires with “highperformance” tires or larger size tires.


Failure to follow these precautions mayadversely affect the handling of thevehicle and make it easier to lose controland roll over.

*[MC27900(ALL)01/96] Tires that are larger or smaller than yourvehicle’s original tires may also affect theaccuracy of your speedometer.


258

[MC28100(ALL)01/96]

three fourths page art:0020366-E

Tire identification chart


Use of aftermarket wheel assemblies maydamage your vehicle or cause accidentsresulting in serious injuries.


259

%*[MC28800(ALL)03/96] Wheel and Tire Matching

*[MC28950(ALL)03/96] See an authorized tire dealer for properservicing procedures. Wheels and tires must beproperly removed, matched and remounted tomaintain the best possible ride.

%*[MC31100(ALL)01/96] Snow Tires and Chains

*[MC31200(ALL)03/96] The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treadsthat provide traction in rain or snow. However,during the winter months in some climates, youmay need to use snow tires and occasionallychains for your tires.


Snow tires must be the same size andgrade as the tires you currently have onyour vehicle.

*[MC31400(ALL)01/96] Do not use chains when using a temporaryspare. For full size tires, use chains on the tiresonly in an emergency or if the law requiresthem where you live. When you use the tirechains:

*[MC31500(ALL)01/96] ❑Make sure the chains are the right size foryour tires. Use only SAE Class “S” chains.Other types may damage your vehicle.

*[MC31550(ALL)01/96] ❑Tire chains may scratch or chip aluminumwheels. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT TIRECHAINS ARE INSTALLED ON STEELWHEELS ONLY. Be sure to remove wheelcovers (if equipped) from steel rims beforeusing tire chains to avoid scratches ordamage.

*[MC31575(ALL)01/96] ❑Local regulations may prohibit or restrict theuse of tire chains. Investigate the laws andregulations in your area before installingchains.


260

[MC31625(ALL)01/96] ❑Put the chains on tightly with the ends helddown securely. Verify that no chain touchesany wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.Retighten the chains after driving 1/2 mile(0.8 km). Follow the chain manufacturer’sinstructions.

*[MC31650(ALL)01/96] ❑Do not drive faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)or the chain manufacturer’s recommendedspeed limit, whichever is lower. Avoidbumps, holes and sharp turns. If you canhear the chains rub or bang against yourvehicle, remove the chains to prevent damageto your vehicle.

*[MC31750(ALL)01/96] ❑Tire chains may affect vehicle handling. Drivecarefully and avoid hard braking.

*[MC31800(ALL)01/96] ❑Avoid fully loading your vehicle if possible.

*[MC31900(ALL)01/96] ❑Remove tire chains at the first opportunityafter using them on snow and ice. Do not usethe chains on dry roads.

*[MC31950(ALL)01/96] ❑Make sure your suspension insulation andbumpers are not missing or worn to avoiddamage to your vehicle.

%*[MC35000(ALL)01/96] Filling the Fuel Tank[MC35100(ALL)01/96]


Fuel filler door


261

%*[MC35200(ALL)01/96] Opening the Fuel Filler Door

[MC35300(ALL)01/96] Fuel filler door remote release

[MC35400(ALL)05/96] To open the fuel filler door latch, pull on therelease lever located between the driver’s seatand the door. You cannot open the fuel fillerdoor by pulling on the door itself.

[MC35500(ALL)01/96]


Fuel filler door remote release lever

[MC35600(ALL)01/96] If the release lever is stuck or damaged and youcannot open the fuel filler door, you must usethe override cord located at the back of the leftrear wheelhouse. (On extended versions therelease lever is located in the stowage box.)

[MC35700(ALL)01/96] The manual release cord is attached to a Thandle marked FUEL FILLER DOOR RELEASE— MANUAL OVERRIDE. When you pull it, thefuel filler door opens.


262

[MC35710(ALL)05/96]


Fuel filler door override handle

%*[MC35720(ALL)01/96] Removing the fuel cap

*[MC35730(ALL)01/96] The proper instructions for removing the fuelcap are as follows:

*[MC35740(ALL)01/96] ❑Unscrew the fuel cap by exerting pressure onthe plastic lock bar and rotating the fuel capcounterclockwise.

*[MC35750(ALL)01/96] ❑Turn the fuel cap 1/2 to 3/4 of a turn until ahissing sound is heard. When the hissingsound stops, continue rotatingcounterclockwise to remove the fuel cap.

*[MC35760(ALL)01/96] ❑Make sure that you follow the above fuel capremoval instructions and use caution. Suchcaution will minimize the possibility of fuelspraying during removal of the fuel cap.

*[MC35770(ALL)03/96] To replace and secure the fuel cap, place it inposition and rotate it clockwise until it clicks(ratchets). Doing so will not damage or break


263

the fuel cap. The ratcheting mechanism allowsthe fuel cap to be sealed without overtightening.

*[MC35780(ALL)01/96] If you lose the fuel cap, replace it with anauthorized Motorcraft or equivalent part.


If you do not use the proper fuel cap, thepressure in the fuel tank can damage thefuel system or cause it to work improperlyin a collision.

*[MC35800(ALL)01/96] NOTE: If you replace your fuel cap with anaftermarket fuel filler cap, the customerwarranty may be void for any damageto the fuel tank and/or fuel system.


The fuel system may be under pressure. Ifthe fuel cap is venting vapor or if youhear a hissing sound, wait until it stopsbefore completely removing the cap.

*[MC35850(ALL)01/96] A venting fuel tank is not an abnormalcondition. It may be caused by:

*[MC35860(ALL)01/96] ❑Too volatile a fuel for the weather conditions.The service stations sometimes sell wintergrade fuel in the summer.

*[MC35870(ALL)01/96] ❑Pulling a heavy load on hot days, or at highaltitudes.

*[MC35880(ALL)01/96] ❑Extended periods of idling with the engineRPM increased above the normal idle range.

*[MC35890(ALL)01/96] ❑Parking vehicle in full sunlight for extendedperiods on extremely hot days.


264

%*[MC35900(ALL)01/96] Choosing the Right Fuel

*[MC35920(ALL)05/96] Use only UNLEADED FUEL. The use of leadedfuel is prohibited by law and could damageyour vehicle. The damage may not be coveredby your warranty.

*[MC35935(ALL)05/96] Your vehicle was not designed to use fuelcontaining manganese-based additives such asMMT. Additionally, vehicles certified toCalifornia emission standards (indicated on theunderhood Vehicle Emissions ControlInformation label) are designed to operate onCalifornia reformulated gasolines. If Californiareformulated gasoline is not available when yourefuel, your vehicle can be operated onnon-California fuels. However, even though yourengine will perform adequately on othergasolines, the performance of the emissioncontrol devices and systems may be adverselyaffected. Repair of damage caused by using afuel that your vehicle was not designed for maynot be covered by your warranty.

%*[MC35940(ALL)04/96] Octane recommendation

*[MC35950(ALL)03/96] Your vehicle is designed to use regular gasolinewith an (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87. We do notrecommend gasolines labeled as “regular” inhigh altitude areas that are sold with octaneratings of 86 or even less.

*[MC35960(ALL)05/96]


Typical octane rating label


265

*[MC36010(ALL)05/96] Do not be concerned if your vehicle sometimesknocks lightly. However, if it knocks heavilyunder most driving conditions on therecommended octane fuel, see your dealer or aqualified service technician to prevent anyengine damage.

%*[MC36040(ALL)05/96] Fuel quality

*[MC36070(ALL)05/96] If you are experiencing starting, rough idle orhesitation problems, try a different brand of fuel.If the condition persists, see your dealer or aqualified service technician.

*[MC36090(ALL)05/96] The American Automobile ManufacturersAssociation (AAMA) issued a gasolinespecification to provide information on highquality fuels that optimize the performance ofyour vehicle. We recommend the use ofgasolines that meet the AAMA specification ifthey are available.

*[MC36200(ALL)05/96] It should not be necessary to add anyaftermarket products to your fuel tank if youcontinue to use a high-quality fuel.

%*[MC36300(ALL)04/96] Gasolines for clean air

*[MC36315(ALL)05/96] Ford approves the use of gasolines to improveair quality, including reformulated gasolines thatcontain oxygenates such as a maximum of 10%ethanol or 15% MTBE. There should be no morethan 5% methanol with cosolvents and additivesto protect the fuel system.

%*[MC36400(ALL)01/96] Safety Information Relating to AutomotiveFuels


Automotive fuels can cause serious injuryor death if misused or mishandled.

*[MC36425(ALL)01/96] ❑Turn vehicle off when refueling.


266

*[MC36430(ALL)08/95] ❑Do not smoke when refueling. Fuels areextremely flammable.

*[MC36435(ALL)08/95] ❑Do not siphon any fuel by mouth.


Gasoline or gasoline blended withmethanol can cause blindness andpossible death when swallowed. If anyfuel is swallowed, call a physician orpoison control center immediately.

*[MC36450(ALL)08/95] ❑Avoid breathing vapors while refueling.

*[MC36500(ALL)08/95] ❑ If fuel is splashed on the skin, wash withsoap and water.

*[MC36510(ALL)08/95] ❑ If fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove contactlenses (if worn), flush with water for 15minutes, and seek medical attention.

*[MC36520(ALL)01/96] Gasoline and gasoline blends may contain smallamounts of carcinogens, such as benzene.Long-term exposure to unleaded gasoline vaporshas caused cancer in laboratory animals.

*[MC36530(ALL)01/96] If you are taking the medication “Antabuse” orother forms of disulfiram for the treatment ofalcoholism, vapor or skin contact with agasoline-methanol blend may cause the samekind of adverse reaction as drinking an alcoholicbeverage. In sensitive individuals, seriouspersonal injury or sickness could result. Consulta physician promptly if you experience anadverse reaction.

*[MC36600(ALL)02/96] Filling the fuel tank


Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressurein an overfilled tank may cause leakageand lead to fuel spray and fire.


267

*[MC36800(ALL)01/96] To fill the fuel tank properly:

*[MC36900(ALL)01/96] NOTE: Extinguish all lit cigarettes, othersmoking materials, and any openflames before fueling your vehicle.

*[MC37000(ALL)01/96] 1. Remove the fuel cap by following theinstructions above under Removing the FuelCap in this chapter. Proceed to add fuel tothe tank only if your vehicle is on levelground.

*[MC37010(ALL)01/96] 2. Make sure that you pump unleaded fuel andput the nozzle all the way inside the fuelfiller pipe.

*[MC37020(ALL)01/96] 3. If you spill any fuel on the body of yourvehicle, clean it off immediately. The fuelmay dull or soften the paint if you do notwash it off.

[MC37030(ALL)05/96] 4. Replace the fuel cap completely when youare finished. Turn it clockwise until it is fullytight. It will click when it is fully tightened.

*[MC37040(ALL)01/96] You may occasionally hear and/or feel a slightthump occurring one or two seconds after agentle stop. This is normal and generally occurswith the fuel tank 3/4 full. It is caused by thewave action of the fuel within the tank.

%*[MC37050(ALL)01/96] Running Out of Fuel

*[MC37060(ALL)01/96] If your vehicle runs out of fuel, try to stop onlevel ground away from traffic. Add at least twogallons (8 liters) of fuel to start your vehicleagain. If your vehicle is not on level ground,you may need as much as five gallons (20 liters)of fuel to start it.

*[MC37070(ALL)08/95] NOTE: Avoid running out of fuel because thissituation may have an adverse effect onmodern powertrain components.


268

*[MC37080(ALL)01/96] You may need to crank the engine several timesbefore the fuel system starts to pump fuel fromthe tank to the engine.

%*[MC37200(ALL)03/96] Fuel Economy

*[MC37250(ALL)01/96] Fuel economy is an estimate of the efficiency ofyour vehicle and can be calculated as Miles PerGallon (MPG) or Liters Per 100 Kilometers(L/100K). Do not calculate the fuel economyduring your vehicle’s break-in period. Thiswould not be an accurate estimate of how muchfuel your vehicle will normally use.

*[MC37260(ALL)01/96] To calculate fuel economy:

*[MC37270(ALL)01/96] 1. Fill the tank completely and record theinitial odometer reading.

*[MC37280(ALL)01/96] 2. Every time you buy fuel record theamount (in gallons or liters) purchased.

*[MC37290(ALL)01/96] 3. After at least three to five tankfuls, fill thefuel tank and record the final odometerreading.

*[MC37300(ALL)01/96] 4. Use these equations to calculate your fueleconomy:

*[MC37320(ALL)01/96] ❑English: MPG = (total miles driven) v(gallons used)

[MC37340(ALL)01/96] ❑Metric: L/100k = (100 x liters used) v (totalkilometers driven)

%*[MC37500(ALL)01/96] Comparisons With EnvironmentalProtection Agency (EPA) and TransportCanada (TC) Fuel Economy Estimates

[MC37510(ALL)04/96] EPA and TC fuel economy figures are obtainedfrom laboratory tests under simulated roadconditions and thus are estimates which may notreflect the actual conditions you experience oryour personal style of driving. The EPA or TCfuel economy estimate is not a guarantee thatyou will achieve the fuel economy shown.


269

*[MC37520(ALL)01/96] The following decrease fuel economy:

*[MC37530(ALL)01/96] ❑Lack of regular, scheduled maintenance

*[MC37540(ALL)01/96] ❑Excessive speed

[MC37550(ALL)04/96] ❑Rapid acceleration

*[MC37560(ALL)01/96] ❑Driving with your foot on the brake

*[MC37570(ALL)01/96] ❑Sudden stops

*[MC37580(ALL)01/96] ❑Extended engine idling

*[MC37590(ALL)01/96] ❑Using speed control in hilly terrain

*[MC37600(ALL)01/96] ❑Extended use of the A/C, defroster, rearwindow defroster and other accessories

*[MC37610(ALL)01/96] ❑Underinflated tires

*[MC37620(ALL)01/96] ❑Heavy loads

*[MC37630(ALL)01/96] ❑Aftermarket add-ons such as bike, ski orluggage racks, bug deflectors, etc.

%*[MC38000(ALL)01/96] Emission Control System

*[MC38100(ALL)01/96] Your vehicle is equipped with a catalyticconverter which enables your vehicle to complywith applicable exhaust emission requirements.

*[MC38110(ALL)01/96] To make sure that the catalytic converter and theother emission control parts continue to workproperly:

*[MC38200(ALL)01/96] ❑Use only unleaded fuel.

*[MC38210(ALL)01/96] ❑Avoid running out of fuel.

*[MC38220(ALL)01/96] ❑Do not turn off the ignition while yourvehicle is moving, especially at high speeds.

*[MC38230(ALL)03/96] ❑Have the services listed in your MaintenanceSchedule booklet performed according to thespecified schedule.


270


Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle indry grass or other dry ground cover. Theemission system heats up the enginecompartment and exhaust system, whichcan start a fire.


On vehicles without original equipmentfloor covering or insulation, do not letpassengers ride in your truck in a mannerthat allows contact between skin and themetal floor.

*[MC38400(ALL)01/96] Watch for fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke, lossof oil pressure, the charge warning light, thecheck engine light, or the temperature warninglight. These sometimes indicate that the emissionsystem is not working properly.

*[MC38410(ALL)01/96] Do not make any unauthorized changes to yourvehicle or engine. Changes that cause moreunburned fuel to reach the exhaust system canincrease the temperature of the engine orexhaust system.

*[MC38420(ALL)01/96] By law, anyone who manufactures, repairs,services, sells, leases, trades vehicles, orsupervises a fleet of vehicles is not permitted tointentionally remove an emission control deviceor prevent it from working. In some of theUnited States and in Canada, vehicle ownersmay be liable if their emission control device isremoved or is prevented from working.

*[MC38430(ALL)08/95] Never use a metal exhaust collector when youservice your vehicle. If the metal collectorcontacts any of your vehicle’s plastic trim orbumper parts they could melt or deform.


271

*[MC38440(ALL)01/96] Do not drive your vehicle if it does not operateproperly. See your dealer if the engine runs onfor more than five seconds after you shut it offor if it misfires, surges, stalls, or backfires.

%*[MC38450(ALL)01/96] Information about your vehicle’s emissioncontrol system is on the Vehicle EmissionControl Information decal located on or near theengine. This decal identifies engine displacementand gives some tune-up specifications.

%*[MC38500(ALL)03/96] How to Prepare Your Vehicle forInspection/Maintenance (I/M) Testing

*[MC38510(ALL)05/96] In some localities it may become a legalrequirement to pass anInspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of theOn-Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system. If thevehicle’s powertrain system or its battery hasjust been serviced, the OBD II system is reset toa not ready for I/M testing condition. Toprepare for I/M testing, the law specifies thatadditional mixed city and highway driving isrequired to complete the check of the OBD IIsystem.

*[MC38520(ALL)05/96] The driving modes required to reach the readycondition consist of a minimum of 30 minutes ofcity and highway driving as described below:

*[MC38525(ALL)03/96] ❑20 minutes of driving in stop and gocity-type traffic with at least four idle periods.

*[MC38535(ALL)03/96] ❑10 minutes of driving on an expressway orhighway.

*[MC38545(ALL)05/96] Before completing the above driving modes, theengine must be warmed up and at operatingtemperature. Once started, the vehicle must notbe turned off during the above driving modes. Ifthe vehicle owner is unable to meet the I/Mrequirements by using these driving patterns, an


272

authorized service center can perform a detailedOBD II drive cycle as it would any other type ofrepair work.

%*[MC44600(ALL)03/96] Lights and Bulb Replacement

*[MC44700(ALL)01/96] It is a good idea to check the operation of thefollowing lights frequently:

*[MC44800(ALL)01/96] ❑headlamps

*[MC44850(ALL)01/96] ❑high-mount brakelamp

*[MC44900(ALL)01/96] ❑ tail lamps

*[MC45000(ALL)01/96] ❑brakelamps

*[MC45100(ALL)01/96] ❑hazard flasher

*[MC45200(ALL)01/96] ❑ turn signals

*[MC45300(ALL)05/96] ❑ license plate lamps

%*[MC45400(ALL)01/96] The alignment of your headlamps should bechecked if:

*[MC45500(ALL)01/96] ❑oncoming motorists frequently signal you toturn off your vehicle’s high beams when youdo not have the high beams on

*[MC45600(ALL)01/96] ❑ the headlamps do not seem to give youenough light to see clearly at night

*[MC45700(ALL)01/96] ❑ the headlamp beams are pointed substantiallyaway from a position slightly down and tothe right

%*[MC45800(ALL)01/96] Headlamp Bulb

*[MC45900(ALL)03/96] The headlamps on your vehicle use replaceablebulbs. When the lamp burns out, simply replacethe bulb, rather than the whole lamp.


273


Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefullyand keep out of children’s reach. Graspthe bulb only by its plastic base and donot touch the glass. The oil from yourhand could cause the bulb to break thenext time the headlamps are operated.

*[MC46050(ALL)01/96] NOTE: If the bulb is accidently touched, itshould be cleaned with rubbingalcohol before being used.

*[MC46100(ALL)01/96] Do not remove the burned-out bulb unless youcan immediately replace it with a new one. If abulb is removed for an extended period of time,contaminants may enter the headlamp housingand affect its performance.

*[MC46300(ALL)03/96] Removing the headlamp bulb

*[MC46400(ALL)01/96] 1. Make sure that the headlamp switch on theinstrument panel is in the OFF position.

[MC46675(ALL)01/96] 2. Remove the screws that attach the headlamptrim to the vehicle.

[MC46750(ALL)01/96] 3. Remove the headlamp trim.

[MC46820(ALL)01/96] 4. Remove the four screws (two on top andtwo on bottom) that attach the headlamp tothe vehicle.

[MC46830(ALL)01/96]



274

[MC46840(ALL)01/96] NOTE: Do not disturb the aim adjustingscrews.

[MC46860(ALL)01/96] 5. Pull the headlamp away from the vehicleand remove the electrical connector bypulling rearward.

[MC46880(ALL)01/96] 6. Unsnap the bulb retaining wire and carefullyremove the bulb assembly from its socket bygently pulling it out without turning it.

[MC46890(ALL)01/96]


*[MC46900(ALL)03/96] Installing the headlamp bulb

*[MC47000(ALL)01/96] 1. With the flat side of the bulb’s plastic basefacing upward, insert the glass end of thebulb into the socket. You may need to turnthe bulb left or right to line up the groovesin the plastic base with the tabs in thesocket. When the grooves are aligned, pushthe bulb into the socket until the plastic basecontacts the rear of the socket.


275

[MC47150(ALL)01/96] 2. Snap the retaining wire over both sides ofthe bulb and connect the electrical connector.

[MC47275(ALL)01/96] 3. Position the headlamp on the vehicle andinstall the four attaching screws.

*[MC47300(ALL)01/96] 4. Turn the headlamps on and make sure thatthey work properly. If the headlamp wascorrectly aligned before you changed thebulb, you should not need to align it again.

[MC47310(ALL)01/96] Removing the High-Mount BrakelampBulb

[MC47315(ALL)01/96] Liftgate models

[MC47317(ALL)01/96] To remove the brakelamp and bulb:

*[MC47330(ALL)01/96] 1. Remove the two screws from the surface ofthe lens.

*[MC47340(ALL)01/96] 2. After removing the screws, remove the lampassembly.

[MC47353(ALL)01/96] 3. Disconnect the high-mount brakelamp wiringconnector.

[MC47356(ALL)01/96] 4. Remove the screw retaining the bulb holderassembly, pull the bulb holder assemblyaway from the lamp, and pull the bulbstraight out of the holder.

[MC47360(ALL)04/96] To replace/install the brakelamp:

[MC47367(ALL)01/96] 1. Push bulb(s) into bulb holder assembly.

[MC47373(ALL)01/96] 2. Place bulb holder assembly on lamp andinstall retaining screw. Tighten screw.

[MC47376(ALL)01/96] 3. Connect the high-mount brakelamp wiringconnector.

[MC47377(ALL)01/96] 4. Position the lamp assembly on the vehicle.

[MC47378(ALL)01/96] 5. Install and tighten the two screws.


276

[MC47380(ALL)01/96] 6. Apply brakes to confirm the brakelamp isfunctional after installing.

[MC47381(ALL)01/96]


Replacing the high-mount brakelamp bulb — liftgatemodels only

[MC47383(ALL)01/96] Dual Rear Door Models

*[MC47384(ALL)01/96] To remove the brakelamp:

*[MC47385(ALL)01/96] 1. Remove the two screws from the surface ofthe lens.

[MC47386(ALL)01/96] 2. Pull the lens assembly out of the lamphousing.

[MC47387(ALL)01/96] 3. Pull the bulb socket out of the lens assembly.It is not necessary to twist the socket.

[MC47388(ALL)01/96] 4. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

[MC47389(ALL)04/96] To replace/install the brakelamp:

[MC47396(ALL)01/96] 1. Push the bulb into the socket.

[MC47397(ALL)01/96] 2. Push the socket into the lens assembly.


277

[MC47398(ALL)01/96] 3. Install the lens assembly into lamp.

[MC47399(ALL)01/96] 4. Install and tighten the two screws.

[MC47400(ALL)01/96]


Replacing the high-mount brakelamp bulb — dual reardoor models only


278

*[MC47625(ALL)02/96] Bulb Specifications

[MC47650(ALL)05/96]

thirty pica chart:0095029-B


279

[MC47675(ALL)05/96]

thirty-four pica chart:0095030-B


280

%*[MC50000(ALL)04/96] Cleaning Your Vehicle%*[MC50010(ALL)01/96] Washing and Polishing Your Vehicle

*[MC50020(ALL)01/96] Wash the outside of your vehicle, including theunderside, with a mild detergent.

*[MC50030(ALL)01/96] DO NOT:

*[MC50040(ALL)01/96] ❑Wash your vehicle with hot water

*[MC50050(ALL)01/96] ❑Wash your vehicle while it sits in directsunlight

*[MC50060(ALL)01/96] ❑Wash your vehicle while the body is hot

*[MC50070(ALL)01/96] Pollen, bird droppings and tree sap can damagethe paint, especially in hot weather. Wash yourvehicle as often as necessary to keep it clean.

*[MC50080(ALL)01/96] Take similar precautions if your vehicle isexposed to chemical industrial fallout.

*[MC50090(ALL)01/96] Paint damage resulting from fallout is notrelated to a defect in paint materials orworkmanship and therefore is not covered bywarranty. Ford, however, believes that continualimprovement in customer satisfaction is a highpriority. For this reason, Ford has authorized itsdealers to repair, at no charge to the owner, thesurfaces of new vehicles damaged byenvironmental fallout within 12 months or 12,000miles (20,000 km) of purchase, whichever comesfirst. Customers may be required to bring theirvehicle in for inspection by a Fordrepresentative.

*[MC50091(ALL)01/96] Polish your vehicle to remove harmful depositsand protect the finish.

%*[MC50095(ALL)01/96] Cleaning Chrome and Aluminum Parts

*[MC50100(ALL)01/96] Wash chrome and aluminum parts with a milddetergent. Do not use steel wool, abrasivecleaners, fuel or strong detergents.


281

%*[MC50110(ALL)01/96] Cleaning Plastic Parts

*[MC50120(ALL)01/96] Some of your vehicle’s exterior trim parts areplastic. Clean with a tar and road oil remover ifnecessary. Use a vinyl cleaner for routinecleaning.

*[MC50130(ALL)01/96] Do not clean plastic parts with thinners, solventsor petroleum-based cleaners.

%*[MC50140(ALL)01/96] If you have your vehicle rustproofed, removeoversprayed rustproofing with a tar and road oilremover. If rustproofing is not removed fromplastic and rubber parts, it can causedeterioration.

%*[MC50150(ALL)03/96] Cleaning the Wheels

*[MC50160(ALL)03/96] Wash the wheels with the same detergent youuse to wash your vehicle’s body. Do not useacid-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, abrasives,fuel, or strong detergents. These substances willdamage protective coatings. Use tar and road oilremover to remove grease and tar.

*[MC50170(ALL)03/96] NOTE: Before going to a car wash, find out ifthe brushes are abrasive.

*[MC50180(ALL)03/96] If you have whitewall tires that are difficult toclean with regular detergent, use Ford ExtraStrength Whitewall Tire Cleaner or equivalent.Follow the directions on the container and rinsethe tires with plenty of clean water.

%*[MC50200(ALL)01/96] Cleaning the Exterior Lamps

*[MC50210(ALL)01/96] Do not use dry paper towel, chemical solventsor abrasive cleaners to clean the lamps, as thesemay cause scratches or crack the lamps.

*[MC50300(ALL)01/96] Cleaning the Engine

*[MC50310(ALL)01/96] A clean engine is more efficient because abuildup of grease and dirt acts as an insulator,keeping the engine warmer than usual.


282

*[MC50320(ALL)01/96] ❑Extreme care must be used if a power washeris used to clean the engine. The high pressurefluid could penetrate sealed parts andassemblies causing damage or malfunctions.

[MC50330(ALL)01/96] ❑ In order to avoid possible cracking of theengine block, do not spray a hot engine withcold water.

[MC50340(ALL)01/96] ❑The alternator and air intake must becovered. Covering these components will helpprevent water damage.

*[MC50350(ALL)01/96] ❑Never wash or rinse the engine while it isrunning. Water getting into the engine maycause internal damage.

*[MC50400(ALL)02/96] Cleaning the Instrument Panel Lens

*[MC50410(ALL)01/96] Clean the instrument panel lens with a soft clothand a glass cleaner, such as Ford Ultra-ClearSpray Glass Cleaner, or equivalent. Do not usepaper towel or an abrasive cleaner to clean thelens as these may cause scratches.

%*[MC50475(ALL)02/96] Cleaning the Interior Lamps

*[MC50490(ALL)02/96] Your interior dome lamps and map lamps areplastic and should be cleaned with a milddetergent diluted in water. Rinse them with clearwater.

%*[MC50500(ALL)03/96] Cleaning the Seats

*[MC50520(ALL)01/96] Vinyl

*[MC50530(ALL)01/96] For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with asoft, damp cloth. For more thorough cleaning,wipe the surface with a leather and vinyl cleaneror a mild soap.

%*[MC50550(ALL)05/96] Fabric

*[MC50560(ALL)05/96] Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broomor a vacuum cleaner. Remove fresh spotsimmediately. Follow the directions that comewith the cleaner.


283

*[MC50600(ALL)05/96] NOTE: Before using any cleaner, test it on asmall, hidden area of fabric. If thefabric’s color or texture is adverselyaffected by a particular cleaner, do notuse it.

% [MC50700(ALL)04/96] Cleaning the Built-In Child Seat (ifequipped)

*[MC50720(ALL)01/96] Your Built-In Child Seat may be cleaned withmild soap and water. Do not use householdcleaners as they may weaken the webbing ordamage the plastic parts. For your convenience,the liner can be removed, machine-washed, andair-dried.

%*[MC50750(ALL)02/96] Cleaning the Safety Belts

*[MC50775(ALL)02/96] Clean the safety belts with any mild soapsolution that is recommended for cleaningupholstery or carpets. Do not bleach or dye thebelt webbing because this may weaken it.

%*[MC56000(ALL)01/96] Vehicle Storage

*[MC56100(ALL)01/96] Maintenance Tips

*[MC56150(ALL)01/96] If you plan on storing your vehicle for anextended period of time (60 days or more), referto the following maintenance recommendationsto ensure your vehicle stays in good operatingcondition.

*[MC56200(ALL)01/96] General

*[MC56300(ALL)01/96] ❑Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place.

*[MC56400(ALL)01/96] ❑Protect from sunlight, if possible.

*[MC56500(ALL)01/96] ❑ If vehicles are stored outside, they requireregular maintenance to protect against rustand damage.


284

*[MC56600(ALL)01/96] Body

*[MC56700(ALL)01/96] ❑Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt,grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior surfaces,rear wheel housing and underside of frontfenders.

*[MC56800(ALL)01/96] ❑Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposedlocations.

*[MC56900(ALL)01/96] ❑Touch-up raw or primed metal to preventrust.

*[MC57000(ALL)01/96] ❑Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with athick coat of auto wax to preventdiscoloration. Re-wax as necessary when thevehicle is washed.

*[MC57100(ALL)01/96] ❑Lubricate all hood, door and trunk lid hingesand latches with a light grade oil.

*[MC57200(ALL)01/96] ❑Cover interior soft trim to prevent fading.

*[MC57300(ALL)01/96] ❑Keep all rubber parts free from oil andsolvents.

%*[MC57350(ALL)01/96] Engine

*[MC57400(ALL)01/96] ❑Start engine every 15 days. Run at fast idleuntil it reaches normal operating temperature.

*[MC57500(ALL)01/96] ❑With your foot on the brake, shift through allthe gears while the engine is running.

%*[MC57600(ALL)01/96] Fuel system

%*[MC57700(ALL)01/96] ❑Fill fuel tank with high-quality unleaded fueluntil the first automatic shutoff of the fuelpump nozzle.

*[MC57900(ALL)01/96] NOTE: During extended periods of vehiclestorage (60 days or more), fuel maydeteriorate due to oxidation. This candamage rubber and other polymers inthe fuel system and may also clogsmall orifices.


285

*[MC58000(ALL)01/96] Ford Gas Stabilizer should be added wheneveractual or expected storage periods exceed 60days. Follow the instructions on the label. Thevehicle should then be operated at idle speed tocirculate the additive throughout the fuel system.

*[MC58100(ALL)01/96] A volatile corrosion inhibitor added to the fuelsystem will protect the fuel system’s innersurfaces from corrosion. Follow the instructionspackaged with the product.

%*[MC58200(ALL)01/96] Cooling system

*[MC58300(ALL)01/96] ❑Protect against freezing temperatures.

%*[MC58400(ALL)01/96] Battery

*[MC58500(ALL)01/96] ❑Check and recharge as necessary.

*[MC58600(ALL)01/96] ❑Keep connections clean and covered with alight coat of grease.

%*[MC58700(ALL)01/96] Brakes

*[MC58800(ALL)01/96] ❑Make sure brakes and parking brake are fullyreleased.

%*[MC58900(ALL)01/96] Tires

*[MC59000(ALL)01/96] ❑Maintain recommended air pressure.

*[MC59100(ALL)01/96] Miscellaneous

*[MC59200(ALL)01/96] ❑Make sure all linkages, cables, levers andclevis pins under vehicle are covered withgrease to prevent rust.

*[MC59300(ALL)01/96] ❑Move vehicles at least 25 feet (8 m) every 15days to lubricate working parts and preventcorrosion.


286

*[MC99950(ALL)05/96] Ford Accessories for Your Vehicle

*[MC99951(ALL)01/96] Ford has many fine products available fromyour dealer to clean your vehicle and protect itsfinishes. For best results, use the following, orproducts of equivalent quality:

*[MC99953(ALL)01/96]



287

*[MC99955(ALL)05/96] A wide selection of accessories is availablethrough your local authorized dealer. These fineaccessories have been engineered specifically tofulfill your automotive needs. They are customdesigned to complement the style andaerodynamic appearance of your Ford-builtvehicle. In addition, each accessory is made fromhigh quality materials and meets or exceedsFord’s rigid engineering and safety specifications.That is why Ford brand accessories arewarranted for up to 12 months or 12,000 miles(20,000 km), whichever comes first. See yourdealer for complete warranty information andaccessory availability.


288

[MC99957(ALL)01/96]

twenty-four pica chart:0095004-A


289

[MC99959(ALL)01/96]


*[MC99961(ALL)05/96] NOTE: When adding accessories, equipment,passengers, and luggage to yourvehicle, do not exceed the total weightcapacity of the vehicle or of the frontor rear axle (GVWR, GAWR as shownon the Safety Compliance CertificationLabel). Consult your dealer for specificweight information.

*[MC99962(ALL)05/96] NOTE: The Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) or the CanadianRadio Telecommunications Commission(CRTC) regulates the use of mobilecommunications systems — such astwo-way radios, telephones, and theftalarms — that are equipped with radiotransmitters. Any such equipmentinstalled in your vehicle should complywith FCC or CRTC regulations andshould be installed only by a qualifiedtechnician.


290

*[MC99963(ALL)05/96] NOTE: Mobile communications systems mayharm the operation of your vehicle,particularly if they are not properlydesigned for automotive use or are notproperly installed. For example, whenoperated, such systems may cause theengine to stumble or stall. In addition,such systems may themselves bedamaged or their operation affected byoperating your vehicle. (Citizens band[CB] transceivers, garage door openers,and other transmitters whose poweroutput is 5 watts or less will notordinarily affect your vehicle’soperation.)

*[MC99965(ALL)05/96] NOTE: Because we have no control over theinstallation, design, or manufacture ofsuch systems, Ford cannot assumeresponsibility for any adverse effects ordamage that may result if you use thisequipment.


291

[MC99967(ALL)03/96]

thirty-six pica chart:0032291-A


293

Capacities andSpecifications

*[CS51500(ALL)01/96] Refill Capacities, Motorcraft Parts,and Lubricant Specifications

%*[CS51550(ALL)01/96] Motorcraft Parts

[CS51575(ALL)05/96]

eighteen pica chart:0095002-B

File:12cpcsa.exUpdate:Thu Jun 6 14:45:39 1996

294

%*[CS51600(ALL)02/96] Fluid Specifications and Capacities

[CS51700(ALL)03/96]

twenty-six pica chart:0095044-C


295

[CS51750(ALL)01/96]

twenty pica chart:0095001-B


296

%*[CS53500(ALL)01/96] Lubricant Specifications

[CS53600(ALL)05/96]



297

[CS53650(ALL)05/96]

twenty six pica chart:0095107-A

%*[CS54000(ALL)03/96] Engine Compartment

*[CS54100(ALL)03/96] Your vehicle has one of the following types ofengines:

*[CS54200(ALL)03/96] ❑A 3.0 Liter SEFI, V-6 engine or

*[CS54300(ALL)03/96] ❑A 4.0 Liter SEFI, V-6 engine.

*[CS54400(ALL)03/96] The following pages show diagrams of eachengine type and where to find items that youshould regularly service.


298

[CS54500(ALL)03/96]


3.0Len

gine

comp

artmen

tservice

poin

ts

File:12cpcsa.exU

pdate:T

hu Jun 6 14:45:39 1996

299

[CS54600(ALL)03/96]

fullpageart:0020532-I

4.0Len

gine

comp

artmen

tservice

poin

ts

File:12cpcsa.exU

pdate:T

hu Jun 6 14:45:39 1996

300

%*[CS55000(ALL)01/96] Your Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

*[CS55100(ALL)04/96] You should include your Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) any time you write to FordMotor Company about your vehicle.

*[CS55200(ALL)03/96] The Vehicle Identification Number is attached toyour vehicle in the following places:

*[CS55300(ALL)03/96] ❑on the metal tag attached to the top of theinstrument panel on the driver’s side — youcan see the tag by looking through thewindshield from outside your vehicle.

*[CS55400(ALL)03/96]


Vehicle Identification Number (VIN/Serial Number)

%*[CS55500(ALL)03/96] ❑on the Safety Compliance Certification Label—this label is attached to the left front doorlock facing or the door latch post pillar. It isrequired by the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration and is made of specialmaterial. If someone tampers with it, it willbe destroyed and/or a destruction patternwill appear.

*[CS55600(ALL)01/96] The label contains the name of the manufacturer,the month and year of manufacture, thecertification statement and the VehicleIdentification Number. The label also containsGross Vehicle Weight Rating and Gross AxleWeight Ratings, wheel and tire data andinformation codes for additional vehicle data.For further information about the SafetyCompliance Certification Label and theinformation contained on it, refer to the Index.


301

Reporting Safety Defects(U.S. Only)

%*[RD06320(ALL)03/96] Reporting Safety Defects(U.S. Only)

*[RD06340(ALL)03/96] If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could cause injuryor death, you should immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford MotorCompany.

*[RD06360(ALL)05/96] If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved in individualproblems between you, your dealer, or FordMotor Company.

*[RD06380(ALL)02/96] To contact NHTSA, you may either call the AutoSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or366-0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or writeto: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation,400 Seventh Street, Washington D.C. 20590. Youcan also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from the Hotline.

File:13cprda.exUpdate:Thu Apr 3 08:22:56 1997

303

Customer Assistance

%*[HS00205(ALL)05/96] Roadside Assistance

*[HS00210(ALL)11/95] Ford Motor Company has set up a 24-hour,seven-day-a-week hotline with trained operatorswho put you in touch with the help you need ifyou experience a problem with your vehicle.This complimentary service is provided to youthroughout your warranty period of 3 years or36,000 miles (60,000 km), whichever comes first.To purchase Roadside Assistance coveragesbeyond this period (available through Ford AutoClub in the United States or Ford andLincoln-Mercury dealers in Canada), contactyour Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer. AdditionalRoadside Assistance coverage is unavailable inPuerto Rico and the Virgin Islands.

*[HS00215(ALL)06/94] Roadside Assistance will cover the following:

*[HS00220(ALL)06/94] ❑Mount your spare if you have a flat tire.

*[HS00225(ALL)06/94] ❑ Jump-start your battery if it is dead.

*[HS00230(ALL)06/94] ❑Unlock your vehicle if you are locked out.

*[HS00235(ALL)06/94] ❑Bring you fuel if you run out.

*[HS00240(ALL)06/94] ❑Tow your vehicle if you are stranded. Evennon-warranty related tows, like accidents orgetting stuck in mud or snow, are covered(some exclusions apply, such as impoundtowing and repossession).

File:14cphsa.exUpdate:Thu Jun 6 14:45:58 1996

304

*[HS00245(ALL)06/94] How to use Roadside Assistance

*[HS00250(ALL)06/94] Your Roadside Assistance identification card canbe found in the Owner Guide portfolio in yourglove compartment. Complete the card and placeit in your wallet for quick reference.

*[HS00255(ALL)04/95] To receive roadside assistance in the UnitedStates call 1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call1-800-665-2006).

*[HS00260(ALL)04/95] Should you need to arrange for roadsideassistance yourself, Ford Motor Company willreimburse the reasonable cost. To obtaininformation about reimbursement call1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call 1-800-665-2006).

*[HS00300(ALL)01/95] If You Have a Service Problem

*[HS00400(ALL)01/95] Ford Motor Company has authorized Ford andLincoln-Mercury dealerships that can serviceyour vehicle for you. This chapter tells you howto get service or maintenance for your vehicle.

%*[HS00550(ALL)02/95] Service/Maintenance Concerns (U.S. orCanada)

*[HS00600(ALL)04/95] Ford recommends taking your vehicle to yourselling dealer who wants to ensure yourcontinued satisfaction. You may, however, takeyour vehicle to any authorized Ford orLincoln-Mercury dealer. In most cases, yourdealer will be able to resolve your concern.

*[HS00700(ALL)04/95] If you are not satisfied with the service youreceived from your dealership’s servicedepartment, talk to the service manager at thedealership, or if you still are not satisfied, talk tothe owner or general manager of the dealership.In most cases, you will have your concernresolved at this level.


305

*[HS01000(ALL)03/95] If you are away from home when your vehicleneeds to be serviced, or if you need more helpthan the dealer gave you, contact the FordCustomer Assistance Center to find anauthorized dealership that may be able to help.

%*[HS01120(ALL)03/95]

one inch art:0060100-E

*[HS01130(ALL)05/96] If you live in Canada and have any questions orconcerns that the dealership cannot answer,contact the Customer Assistance Centre.

%*[HS01140(ALL)04/95]


*[HS01200(ALL)04/95] To process your request, the Ford CustomerAssistance Center needs the followinginformation:

*[HS01300(ALL)05/96] ❑your telephone number (both business andhome)

*[HS01400(ALL)05/96] ❑ the name of the dealer and the city where thedealership is located

*[HS01500(ALL)05/96] ❑ the year and make of your vehicle

*[HS01550(ALL)05/96] ❑ the date purchased

*[HS01600(ALL)05/96] ❑ the current mileage on your vehicle

*[HS01700(ALL)05/96] ❑your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)


306

*[HS03300(ALL)05/96] If you still have a complaint involving awarranty dispute, you may wish to contact theDispute Settlement Board (U.S. only) or theCanadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP) in Canada.

*[HS03400(ALL)05/96] A warranty dispute must be submitted to theDispute Settlement Board before taking actionunder the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or tothe extent allowed by state law, before pursuingreplacement or repurchase remedies provided bycertain state laws. This dispute handlingprocedure is not required prior to enforcing statecreated rights or other rights which areindependent of the Magnuson-Moss WarrantyAct or state replacement or repurchase laws.

%*[HS03500(ALL)05/96] The Dispute Settlement Board(U.S. Only)

*[HS03600(ALL)05/96] The Dispute Settlement Board is:

*[HS03700(ALL)05/96] ❑an independent, third-party arbitrationprogram for warranty disputes

*[HS03800(ALL)05/96] ❑available free to owners and lessees ofqualifying Ford Motor Company vehicles

*[HS03900(ALL)05/96] The Dispute Settlement Board may not beavailable in all states. Ford Motor Companyreserves the right to change eligibilitylimitations, modify procedures and/or todiscontinue this service without notice andwithout incurring obligations.

*[HS04000(ALL)05/96] What Kinds of Cases Does the BoardReview?

*[HS04100(ALL)05/96] The Board reviews all warranty performancecomplaints on Ford, Mercury and Lincoln carsand Ford and Mercury light trucks under thenew vehicle limited warranty that have not beenresolved by either a dealer or Ford MotorCompany, except those involving:


307

*[HS04200(ALL)05/96] ❑a non-Ford product

*[HS04300(ALL)05/96] ❑a non-Ford dealership

*[HS04400(ALL)05/96] ❑a vehicle sales transaction

*[HS04500(ALL)05/96] ❑ request for reimbursement of consequentialexpenses. Expenses incidental to the warrantycomplaint being reviewed are eligible forconsideration.

*[HS04600(ALL)05/96] ❑ items not covered by the new vehicle limitedwarranty

*[HS04700(ALL)05/96] ❑ items covered by a service contract

*[HS04800(ALL)05/96] ❑alleged liability claims

*[HS04900(ALL)05/96] ❑property damage where the damage issignificant when compared to the economicloss alleged under the warranty dispute

*[HS05000(ALL)05/96] ❑cases currently in litigation

*[HS05100(ALL)05/96] ❑vehicles not used primarily for family,personal, or household purposes (except instates where the Dispute Settlement Board isrequired to review commercial vehicles)

*[HS05200(ALL)05/96] Complaints involving vehicles in whichapplicable new vehicle limited warranties haveexpired at receipt of your application are noteligible. Eligibility may differ according to statelaw. For example, see the unique brochures forCalifornia and Wisconsin purchasers/lessees.

*[HS05300(ALL)05/96] How Does the Board Work?

*[HS05400(ALL)05/96] The Board consists of:

*[HS05500(ALL)05/96] ❑ three consumer representatives

*[HS05600(ALL)05/96] ❑a Ford or Lincoln/Mercury dealer

*[HS05700(ALL)05/96] Consumer candidates for Board membership arerecruited and trained by an independentconsulting firm. Dealers are chosen because oftheir business leadership qualities.


308

*[HS05800(ALL)05/96] What the Board needs

*[HS05900(ALL)05/96] To have your case reviewed you must completethe application in the DSB brochure and mail itto the address provided on the application form.

*[HS06000(ALL)05/96] Your application is reviewed and, if it isdetermined to be eligible, you will receive anacknowledgment indicating:

*[HS06100(ALL)05/96] ❑ the file number assigned to your application

*[HS06200(ALL)05/96] ❑ the toll-free phone number of the DSB’sindependent administrator

*[HS06300(ALL)05/96] Your dealership and a Ford Motor Companyrepresentative are asked to submit statements atthis time.

*[HS06400(ALL)05/96] To review your case properly, the Board needsthe following information:

*[HS06500(ALL)05/96] ❑ legible copies of all documents andmaintenance or repair orders relevant to thecase

*[HS06600(ALL)05/96] ❑ the year, make, model, and VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) listed on yourvehicle ownership license

*[HS06700(ALL)05/96] ❑ the date of repair(s) and mileage at the timeof occurrence(s)

*[HS06800(ALL)05/96] ❑ the current mileage

*[HS06900(ALL)05/96] ❑ the name of the dealer who sold or servicedthe vehicle

*[HS07000(ALL)05/96] ❑a brief description of your unresolved concern

*[HS07100(ALL)05/96] ❑a brief summary of the action taken with thedealer and Ford Motor Company

*[HS07200(ALL)05/96] ❑ the names (if known) of all the people youcontacted at the dealership


309

*[HS07300(ALL)05/96] ❑a description of the action you expect toresolve your concern

*[HS07400(ALL)05/96] Should your case NOT qualify for review, aletter of explanation will be mailed to you.

*[HS07500(ALL)05/96] Oral presentations

*[HS07600(ALL)05/96] If the involved vehicle is within 36 months and36,000 miles of the warranty start date, you havethe right to make an oral presentation before theBoard. Indicate your choice to do so on theapplication. Oral presentations may also berequested by the Board.

*[HS07700(ALL)05/96] Making a decision

*[HS07800(ALL)05/96] Board members will review all availableinformation related to the complaint, includingoral presentations, if necessary. They then arriveat a fair and impartial decision, decided by asimple majority vote.

*[HS07900(ALL)05/96] Because the Board usually meets only once amonth, some cases may take longer than 30 daysto be reviewed. The Board makes every effort toresolve each case within 40 days of receiving theconsumer application form.

*[HS08000(ALL)05/96] After your case is reviewed, the Board mails youa decision letter. The Board also provides a formon which to accept or reject the Board’s decision.The decisions of the Board are binding on thedealer and Ford, but not on consumers who mayelect to pursue other remedies available to themunder state or federal law. Decisions of theBoard may be presented as evidence by anyparty in subsequent legal proceedings that maybe initiated, where allowed by law.


310

*[HS08100(ALL)05/96] To Request a DSB Brochure/Application

*[HS08200(ALL)05/96] For a brochure/application, speak to your dealeror write to the Board at the following address:

*[HS08300(ALL)05/96]


*[HS08400(ALL)05/96] Ford of Canada does not have a DisputeSettlement Board. If you have a problem thatcannot be resolved by an agreement among you,Ford of Canada, and the Ford dealer, contact theCanadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP). In many areas of Canada, CAMVAPwill help resolve the problem and, if necessary,will arrange for the matter to be arbitrated.

%*[HS08410(ALL)05/96] Ford of Canada CustomerAssistance

*[HS08420(ALL)05/96] If you live in Canada and have any questions orconcerns that the dealership cannot answer,contact the Customer Assistance Centre.

*[HS08430(ALL)05/96]



311

%*[HS08440(ALL)05/96] Mediation/Arbitration Program(Canada Only)

*[HS08450(ALL)05/96] In those cases where you continue to feel thatthe efforts by Ford and the dealer to resolve afactory-related vehicle service concern have beenunsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in animpartial third party mediation/arbitrationprogram administered by the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).

*[HS08460(ALL)05/96] The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward andrelatively speedy alternative to resolve adisagreement when all other efforts to produce asettlement have failed. This procedure is withoutcost to you and is designed to eliminate theneed for lengthy and expensive legalproceedings.

*[HS08470(ALL)05/96] In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-partyArbitrators conduct hearings at mutuallyconvenient times and places in an informalenvironment. These impartial Arbitrators reviewthe positions of the parties, make decisions and,where appropriate, render awards to resolvedisputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair andfinal as the arbitrator’s award is binding on bothyou and Ford of Canada.

*[HS08500(ALL)05/96] CAMVAP services are available in all territoriesand provinces, except Quebec. For moreinformation, without charge or obligation, callyour CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directlyat 1-800-207-0685.


312

%*[HS08600(ALL)05/96] Getting Help Outside the U.S.and Canada

*[HS08700(ALL)05/96] Before you export your vehicle to a foreigncountry, contact the appropriate foreign embassyor consulate to make sure local regulations donot prevent you from registering your vehicle.Officials at the embassy can also help you decidewhether you should import your vehicle to thatcountry.

*[HS08800(ALL)06/95] Officials at the embassy or consulate can tell youwhere to get unleaded fuel. If you cannot getunleaded fuel or can get only fuel with ananti-knock index that is lower than your vehicleneeds, contact a district or owner relations officebefore you leave the U.S. or Canada.

*[HS08900(ALL)05/96] Use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without aproper conversion may damage the effectivenessof your emissions control system and may causeengine knocking or serious engine damage. FordMotor Company is not responsible for anydamage that is caused by use of improper fuel.

*[HS09000(ALL)06/95] You may also have difficulty importing yourvehicle back into the U.S. if you use leaded fuel.

*[HS09100(ALL)06/95] If your vehicle must be serviced while you aretraveling or living in Central or South America,the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact thenearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannothelp you, write to:

*[HS09200(ALL)06/95]



313

*[HS09300(ALL)06/95] If you are in other foreign countries, contact thenearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannothelp you, they can direct you to the appropriateFord affiliate office.

*[HS09400(ALL)06/95] If you buy your vehicle in North America andthen relocate outside of the U.S. or Canada,register your Vehicle Identification Number andnew address with Ford Motor Company ExportOperations.


257

Accessories

*[AC00400(ALL)03/95] Ford Accessories for Your Vehicle

*[AC00425(ALL)04/95] Ford has many fine products available fromyour dealer to clean your vehicle and protect itsfinishes. For best results, use the following, orproducts of equivalent quality:

*[AC00450(ALL)05/95]

twelve pica chart:0001433-A

*[AC00500(ALL)04/95] A wide selection of accessories is availablethrough your local authorized dealer. These fineaccessories have been engineered specifically tofulfill your automotive needs. They are customdesigned to complement the style andaerodynamic appearance of your Ford-builtvehicle. In addition, each accessory is made fromhigh quality materials and meets or exceedsFord’s rigid engineering and safety specifications.That is why Ford brand accessories arewarranted for up to 3 years or 36,000 miles(60,000 km), whichever comes first. See yourdealer for complete warranty information andaccessory availability.

File:14cpaca.exUpdate:Tue Aug 29 17:52:30 1995

258

[AC00700(ALL)06/95]

twenty-four pica chart:0095004-A


259

[AC00800(ALL)06/95]

ten pica chart:0095005-A

*[AC01900(ALL)01/95] NOTE: When adding accessories, equipment,passengers, and luggage to yourvehicle, do not exceed the total weightcapacity of the vehicle or of the frontor rear axle (GVWR, GAWR as shownon the Safety Compliance CertificationLabel). Consult your dealer for specificweight information.

*[AC02000(ALL)05/95] NOTE: The Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) or the CanadianRadio Telecommunications Commission(CRTC) regulates the use of mobilecommunications systems — such astwo-way radios, telephones, and theftalarms — that are equipped with radiotransmitters. Any such equipmentinstalled in your vehicle should complywith FCC or CRTC regulations andshould be installed only by a qualifiedtechnician.


260

*[AC02100(ALL)01/95] NOTE: Mobile communications systems mayharm the operation of your vehicle,particularly if they are not properlydesigned for automotive use or are notproperly installed. For example, whenoperated, such systems may cause theengine to stumble or stall. In addition,such systems may themselves bedamaged or their operation affected byoperating your vehicle. (Citizens band[CB] transceivers, garage door openers,and other transmitters whose poweroutput is 5 watts or less will notordinarily affect your vehicle’soperation.)

*[AC02200(ALL)05/95] NOTE: Because we have no control over theinstallation, design, or manufacture ofsuch systems, Ford cannot assumeresponsibility for any adverse effects ordamage that may result if you use thisequipment.


262

[AC03100(ALL)08/95]

thirty-four pica chart:0095079-A


263

[AC03200(ALL)08/95]



264

[AC03300(ALL)08/95]



327

[QI02500(ALL)10/95]

fullpageart:0095059-A

File:16cpqia.exU

pdate:Fri Jun 14 10:21:06 1996

328

[QI02600(ALL)08/95]


Front

exteriorview

File:16cpqia.exU

pdate:Fri Jun 14 10:21:06 1996

329

[QI03200(ALL)08/95]


Rear

exteriorview

File:16cpqia.exU

pdate:Fri Jun 14 10:21:06 1996

330

[QI03800(ALL)08/95]


En

trance

view

File:16cpqia.exU

pdate:Fri Jun 14 10:21:06 1996

331

[QI04400(ALL)08/95]


Driver’s

door

File:16cpqia.exU

pdate:Fri Jun 14 10:21:06 1996

332

[QI05000(ALL)08/95]


Instru

men

tp

anel

File:16cpqia.exU

pdate:Fri Jun 14 10:21:06 1996

333

[QI05600(ALL)08/95]


Instru

men

tclu

ster

File:16cpqia.exU

pdate:Fri Jun 14 10:21:06 1996

334

[QI06200(ALL)05/96]


Rear

cargoarea

(extend

edlen

gthw

agonsh

own

)

File:16cpqia.exU

pdate:Fri Jun 14 10:21:06 1996

Index 335

Index

A

Accessory position on the ignition . . . . . 74Additives, engine oil . . . . . . . . . . 233Air bag supplemental restraint system

and child safety seats . . . . . . . . . 130description . . . . . . . . . . . . 122, 125driver air bag . . . . . . . . . . 122, 125indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125passenger air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 125service and information labels . . . . . 125tone generator . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Air cleaner filterlocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Air conditioningauxiliary heater and air conditioner . . . 67manual heating and air conditioning

system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Alcohol, in fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Antenna, radio

(see Electronic sound system) . . . . . . 21Antifreeze (see Engine coolant) . . . . . . 240Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163see also Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . 163warninig light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Appeals (see Dispute settlement board) . . 306Assistance (see Customer assistance) . . . 303Audio system (see Electronic

sound system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

336 Index

Autolamp system (see Headlamps) . . . . . 72Automatic transmission

fluid, adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248fluid, checking . . . . . . . . . . . . 247fluid, refill capacities . . . . . . . . . 294fluid, specification. . . . . . . . . . . 296

Axlelubricant specifications. . . . . . . . . 296refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 294traction lok . . . . . . . . . . . . 177, 254

B

Basic vehicle warranty . . . . . . . . . . . 3Battery

acid, treating emergencies . . . . . 223, 250charging system warning light . . . . . . 13disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226how to service . . . . . . . . . . . . 249jumping a disabled battery. . . . . . . 222maintenance-free . . . . . . . . . . . 249proper disposal, recycling . . . . . . . 250replacement, specifications . . . . . . . 293servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249voltage gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 15when storing your vehicle . . . . . . . 285

Brake fluidbrake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . 9checking and adding . . . . . . . . . 236description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 237, 296

Brakelamp, high-mount brakelamp . . . . . 72Brakes

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163anti-lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163applying the brakes . . . . . . . . . . 166brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . 9fluid, checking and adding. . . . . . . 236fluid, refill capacities . . . . . . . 236, 294

File:cpixa.exUpdate:Fri Jun 7 14:33:41 1996

Index 337

Brakes (continued)fluid, specifications . . . . . . . . 237, 296front disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163if brakes do not grip well . . . . . 164, 166master cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . 236new brake linings. . . . . . . . . . . . 5noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163, 165parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166power braking . . . . . . . . . . . . 163rear anti-lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164, 236stopping distances . . . . . . . . . . 165trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195when storing your vehicle . . . . . . . 285

Brake-shift interlock . . . . . . . . . 155, 171Break-in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Brights (high beams) . . . . . . . . . . . 14Built-in child seat

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Bulbs, replacinghalogen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

C

Canada, customer assistance . . . . . . . 310Canada, warranty information . . . . . . . 3Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan

(CAMVAP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Capacities for refilling fluids . . . . . . . 294Carbon monoxide in exhaust . . . . . . . 160Car seats for children (see Child safety seats) 130Cassette tape player (see Electronic sound

system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 49Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . 269CD player (see Electronic sound system) . . 29Chains, tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Changing a tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209


338 Index

Charging system gauge . . . . . . . . . . 15Charging system warning light . . . . . . . 13Child safety restraints

built-in child seat . . . . . . . . . . . 141child safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . 150child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Child safety seatsand air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130attaching with tether straps . . . . . . 139automatic locking mode (retractor) . 112, 130built-in child seat . . . . . . . . . . . 141in front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130in rear outboard seat . . . . . . . . . 130in rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130tether anchorage hardware . . . . . . . 139

Chimeheadlamps on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14key in ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Circuit breakerschecking and replacing . . . . . . . . 209see also fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Cleaning your vehiclebuilt-in child seat . . . . . . . . . . . 283CD player and discs. . . . . . . . . . . 32chrome and aluminum parts . . . . . . 280engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . 281exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280exterior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 281fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281instrument panel . . . . . . . . . 61, 281instrument panel lens . . . . . . . . . 282interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282interior lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . 282mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91


Index 339

Cleaning your vehicle (continued)plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281polishing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70rustproofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281upholstery and interior trim . . . . . . 282washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Climate control systemair conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . 62heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62heating only system. . . . . . . . . . . 65

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 44Cold engine starting. . . . . . . . . . . 154Combination lap and shoulder belts . 108, 110Compact disc player

(see Electronic sound system) . . . . 22, 29Compact disc radio

(see Electronic sound system) . . . . . . 22Console, description . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Controls, mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Convenience kit in cargo area . . . . . . 211Coolant (see Engine coolant)

checking and adding . . . . . . . . . 240drain and flush . . . . . . . . . . . . 243preparing for storage . . . . . . . . . 285refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 294specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . 17warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Cooling fan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Crankcase emission filter. . . . . . . . . 293Customer Assistance Center, Ford (U.S.). . 305Customer Assistance Centre,

Ford of Canada. . . . . . . . . . 305, 310


340 Index

D

Daytime running light system . . . . . . . 72Defects, reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Defrost, rear window . . . . . . . . . . . 69Dipstick

automatic transmission fluid . . . . 246, 248engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . 244

Disabled vehicle (see Towing) . . . . . . 226Dispute Settlement Board . . . . . . . . 306Doors

door ajar warning light . . . . . . . . . 11lubricant specifications. . . . . . . . . 296

Driveline universal joint and slip yoke . . 248Driving under special conditions,

heavy load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

E

Electrical systemcircuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . 209fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200operating when the engine is off . . . . . 74

Electronic radio with cassette(see Electronic sound system) . . . . . . 49

Electronic sound systemaccessory delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74tuning the radio . . . . . . . . 23, 37, 49warranty and service information. . . . . 58

Electronic stereo cassette radio(see Electronic sound system) . . . . . . 49

Electronic stereo radio (see Electronicsound system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Emergencies, roadsideassistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303battery acid spills . . . . . . . . . 223, 251fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226


Index 341

Emergency brake (parking brake) . . . . . 165Emission control system

catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . 269emissions warranty . . . . . . . . . 3, 269

Enginecheck engine warning light . . . . . . . 12does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . 158fuel injected engine, starting . . . . . . 153fuel pump shut-off switch . . . . . . . 158preparing to start . . . . . . . . . . . 153refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 294service points . . . . . . . . . . . . 297starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154starting after a collision . . . . . . . . 158storing your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . 283

Engine block heater . . . . . . . . . . . 157Engine coolant

checking and adding . . . . . . . . . 240checking hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . 243disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230, 248drain and flush . . . . . . . . . . . . 243preparing for storage . . . . . . . . . 285proper solution . . . . . . . . . . 230, 248recovery reservoir . . . . . . . . 240, 297refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 294specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Engine coolant temperature gaugedescription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Engine coolant temperaturegauge:electronic. . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Engine fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Engine:idle speed control . . . . . . . . 156Engine knocking . . . . . . . . . . . . 264


342 Index

Engine oilchanging oil and oil filter . . . . . . . 234checking and adding . . . . . . . . . 234dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230, 248engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . 16filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . . 293refill capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 294specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 233, 296synthetic oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233“break-in” oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Entry system, illuminated . . . . . . . . . 73Exhaust fumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Extended Service Plan, Ford . . . . . . . . 3

F

Fan, engine fan, avoiding injury . . . . . 230Federal Communications Commission . . . . 58Federal Highway Administration

Regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Flashers, hazard . . . . . . . . . . . 78, 199Flat tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Fluid refill capacities. . . . . . . . . . . 294Ford Customer Assistance Center . . . . . 305Ford Dispute Settlement Board . . . . . . 306Ford Extended Service Plan . . . . . . . . 3Ford Motor Company of Canada . . . . . 310Ford of Canada Customer

Assistance Centre . . . . . . . . . . . 310Foreign registration . . . . . . . . . . . 312Four-Wheel Drive vehicles, special notice . . 5Four-wheeling with Ford supplement . . . . 5French owner guides, how to obtain . . . . 3


Index 343

Fuelcalculating fuel economy . . . . . . . 268capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294choosing the right fuel . . . . . . . . 264comparisons with EPA fuel

economy estimates . . . . . . . . . 268filling your vehicle with fuel. . . . . . 260filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . . 293fuel filler door release lever . . . . . . 260fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264running out of fuel . . . . . . . . . . 267safety information relating to

automotive fuels . . . . . . . . . . 265storing your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . 284treating emergencies . . . . . . . . . 265

Fuel cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260removing . . . . . . . . . . . . 260, 262replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . 260, 263

Fuel filler dooroverride, manual . . . . . . . . . . . 261remote release . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Fuel filter, specifications . . . . . . . . . 293Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Fuel pump shut-off switch

engine does not start . . . . . . . . . 158starting after a collision . . . . . . . . 158

Fuse panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Fuses

charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . 209


344 Index

G

Gas cap (see Fuel cap) . . . . . . . . . . 260Gas mileage (see Fuel economy) . . . 264, 268Gasohol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Gasoline (see Fuel). . . . . . . . . . . . 260Gauges, Mechanical

battery voltage gauge . . . . . . . . . . 15charging system gauge . . . . . . . . . 15engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . 17engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . 16fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . 179, 185driving with a heavy load . . . . . . . 179location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Gearshiftautomatic operation . . . . . . . . . . 170column-mounted . . . . . . . . . . . 170gearshift override . . . . . . . . . 155, 171locking the gearshift. . . . . . . . . . . 74positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170shifting the gears . . . . . . . . . . . 170shift-lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155, 171

Gearshift:shifting the gears . . . . . . . . 170GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

calculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . 179, 184driving with a heavy load . . . . . . . 179location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185


Index 345

H

Hazard flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . 78, 199Headlamps

aiming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272checking alignment . . . . . . . . . . 272cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . 72replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 272turning on and off . . . . . . . . . . . 71warning chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Heatingheating and air conditioning system . . . 62rear seat controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 67standard heater system . . . . . . . . . 65

High beamsindicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

High-mount brakelamp, description. . . . . 72High-mount brakelamp:location . . . . . . 72Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Hood

latch location . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231lubrication specifications. . . . . . . . 296release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231working under the hood . . . . . . . 230

Hoses, checking. . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

I

Identification Number, Vehicle (VIN) . . . 300Idle

relearning . . . . . . . . . . 226, 230, 250speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Ignitionchime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14positions of the ignition . . . . . . . . . 74

Indicator lights and chimes (see Lights) . . . 7Infant seats (see Safety seats) . . . . . 128, 130Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9


346 Index

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Integrated child seat(see Built-in child seat) . . . . . . . . 141

Interval wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

JJack

operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216, 219positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . 216, 219storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Jump-starting your vehicleattaching cables . . . . . . . . . . . . 224disconnecting cables . . . . . . . . . . 226

KKeys

key in ignition chime . . . . . . . . . . 14positions of the ignition . . . . . . . . . 74stuck in lock position . . . . . . . . . . 74

LLamps

checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272daytime running light system . . . . . . 72hazard flashers . . . . . . . . . . 78, 199headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71high-mount brakelamp . . . . . . . . . 72illuminated entry system. . . . . . . . . 73interior lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 272trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Lane change indicator (see Turn signal) . . . 75Lap belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Lights, warning and indicator

air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9charging system. . . . . . . . . . . . . 13check engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12door ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11


Index 347

Lights, warning and indicator (continued)engine oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 16hazard warning light . . . . . . . . 78, 199high beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11service engine soon . . . . . . . . . . . 12turn signal indicator . . . . . . . . . . 75

Load limitsGAWR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179GVWR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179trailer towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Lubricant specifications . . . . . . . . . 296Lug nuts

standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219tightening sequence . . . . . . . . 216, 221

Lumbar support, seats . . . . . . . . . . 106Lumbar support pad . . . . . . . . . . 106

M

Maintenance schedule and record(see separate Maintenance Scheduleand Record booklet) . . . . . . . . . . 3

Maintenance (see Servicing) . . . . . . . 229Manual transmission

fluid capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 294lubricant specifications . . . . . . . . 296

Master cylinder, brakes . . . . . . . . . 236Methanol in fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Mileage, calculating fuel economy . . . . 268Mirrors

dual electric remote control . . . . . . . 91rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91side view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . 91side view mirrors (power) . . . . . . . . 91

Motorcraft parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . 293


348 Index

NNational Highway Traffic Safety

Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . 301New vehicle break-in . . . . . . . . . . . 5

OOctane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264Odometer

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Oil (see Engine oil) . . . . . . . . . . . 233Oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233On-board diagnostic (OBD II) system . . . 271Order forms, service information . . . . 25, 50Overdrive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Overseas offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

PParking brake

operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Parts (see Motorcraft Parts) . . . . . . . . 293PCV valve, specifications . . . . . . . . . 293Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Power features

door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . 106mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Power steeringdipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244driving with power steering . . . . . . 168fluid, checking and adding. . . . . . . 244fluid, refill capacity . . . . . . . . . . 294fluid, specifications . . . . . . . . . . 296servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Prop rod, hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231


Index 349

RRadio (see Electronic sound systems) . . . . 21Rear anti-lock brakes . . . . . . . . . . 164

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Rear axle

lubricant specification . . . . . . . . . 296refill capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . 294traction lok. . . . . . . . . . . . 177, 254

Rear climate control system . . . . . . . . 67Rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Refill capacities for fluids . . . . . . . . 294Regulations, National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration . . . . . . . . . 301Remote entry system, illuminated entry . . . 73Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . 301Restraints, safety (see Safety restraints)

adult . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 108child. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 130

Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Roadside assistance . . . . . . . . . . . 303Roadside emergencies . . . . . . . . . . 199Rotating the tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

SSafety belts (see Safety restraints) . . . . . 108Safety chains, when towing a trailer . . . 194Safety Compliance Certification Label . . . 300Safety defects, reporting . . . . . . . . . 301Safety information relating to

automotive fuels . . . . . . . . . . . 265Safety restraints

adjusting the safety belts . . . . . 110, 117automatic locking mode . . . . . . . . 112automatic locking mode (retractor) . . . 112center front lap belt . . . . . . . . . . 116center rear lap belt . . . . . . . . . . 116cleaning the safety belts . . . . . . . . 283extension assembly . . . . . . . . . . 117


350 Index

Safety restraints (continued)for adults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108for children. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128for infants . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 130for pregnant women. . . . . . . . 98, 108lap and shoulder belts . . . . . . . 108, 110lap belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118proper use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118untwisting or unjamming the

safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118warning light and chime. . . . . . . . . 11

Safety seats for childrenand air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130attaching with tether straps . . . . . . 139automatic locking mode (retractor) . 112, 130built-in child seat . . . . . . . . . . . 141in front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130in rear outboard . . . . . . . . . . . 130in rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130tether anchorage hardware . . . . . . . 139

Seat belts (see Safety restraints) . . . . . . 108Seats

adjusting the seat, manual . . . . . . . . 97child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . 130cleaning upholstery . . . . . . . . . . 282lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . 106quick release rear captain’s chair . . . . . 99reclining the seat . . . . . . . . . . . . 97seatback release . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97seat/bed conversion . . . . . . . . . . 106

Serial number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 300Service concerns . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Servicing your vehicle

precautions when servicing . . . . . . 230servicing when you tow . . . . . . . . 226

Shift-lock system . . . . . . . . . . 155, 171Shift positions (see Gearshift) . . . . . . . 170


Index 351

Shoulder and lap belts(see Safety restraints) . . . . . . . 108, 110

Shoulder belts (see Safety restraints) . . . 110Side mirrors

adjusting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . 259Spare tire

changing the tire . . . . . . . . . 209, 216conventional spare . . . . . . . . 209, 211finding the spare . . . . . . . . . . . 211removing the spare tire . . . . . . . . 211storing the flat tire . . . . . . . . 211, 219temporary spare . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Spark plugs, specifications . . . . . . . . 293Special notice

E-4WD vehicles. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Specification chart, lubricants. . . . . . . 296Speed control

turning off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80when towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . 196

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Starting your vehicle

preparing to start your vehicle . . . . . 153starting a cold engine . . . . . . . . . 154starting after a collision . . . . . . . . 158starting a warm engine . . . . . . . . 154starting your vehicle if the battery

is disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Steering, power . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Steering wheel

locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Storage compartmentscenter console . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92underseat storage drawer . . . . . . . 107

Storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 283Supplemental air bag readiness light . . . . 13Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . 122


352 Index

T

Tail lampsbulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 272cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Temperature control (see Climate control) . . 61Tether anchor installation

(see Child restraints) . . . . . . . . . 139Tilt steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Tires

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209checking the pressure . . . . . . . . . 252cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281inspection and maintenance . . . . . . 252replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . 259spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209, 211storing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 285tire grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256wear bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256wheel and tire matching . . . . . . . . 259

Towing your vehicleusing wheel dollies . . . . . . . . . . 226with a tow truck . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Traction control . . . . . . . . . . . 177, 254Traction-lok rear axle . . . . . . . . 177, 254Trailer towing

calculating maximum trailer weight . . . 187safety chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194trailer brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195trailer lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195


Index 353

Transmissionautomatic operation . . . . . . . . . . 170fluid, checking and adding

(automatic) . . . . . . . . . . . . 247fluid, refill capacities . . . . . . . . . 294lubricant specifications . . . . . . . . 296

Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Tune-up specifications (VECI) . . . . . . 271Turn signal

indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

U

Used engine oil, disposal . . . . . . 230, 248

V

Variable interval wipers . . . . . . . . . . 76VECI (Vehicle Emission Control Information)

decal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . 300Vehicle loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

calculating the load . . . . . . . . . . 187understanding loading information . . . 179

Vehicle storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Ventilating your vehicle

(see Climate control) . . . . . . . . . . 61Viscosity (see Engine oil) . . . . . . . . 233Voltmeter (see Battery voltage gauge) . . 13, 15


354 Index

WWarm engine, starting . . . . . . . . . . 154Warning chimes

headlamps on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14key in ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Warning lights (see Lights) . . . . . . . . . 7Warranties

basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Canada. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Warranty Information Booklet . . . . . . . 3Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Weight limits (GAWR, GVWR) . . . . . . 179Wheel and tire matching . . . . . . . . . 259Wheel bearings, lubricant specifications . . 296Wheel dollies (see Towing) . . . . . . . . 226Wheels

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216, 219inspection and maintenance . . . . . . 252lug nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Windowsliftgate window . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85manual windows, operating . . . . . . . 89one-touch down. . . . . . . . . . . . . 90power windows, operating. . . . . . . . 89rear, defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69


Index 355

Windshield, washing . . . . . . . . . . . 76Windshield washer fluid and wipers

checking and replacing wiper blades . . 251operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 239, 296variable interval wipers . . . . . . . . . 76

Windshield wipers and washer . . . . . . . 76Wrecker towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226


356

Service StationInformation

[GS00200(ALL)08/95]

twenty-six pica chart:0095019-C

File:17cpgsa.exUpdate:Thu Jun 13 08:56:18 1996

file: 1997 aerostar update:fri jun 7 14:22:51 1996

Documents